PLAN ENGLISH 20122013

Bạn đang xem bản rút gọn của tài liệu. Xem và tải ngay bản đầy đủ của tài liệu tại đây (919.2 KB, 258 trang )

(1)lTUẦN DẠY BÙ – ÔN TẬP Period 1 THE PAST SIMPLE TENSE I. Objectives 1. Knowledge:Help students use the past simple tense correctly. 2. Skills: writinng 3. Education: Not available II. Grammar 1. Definition The past simple tense: describe the actions that happened in the past. * The adverbs to recognize the tense: ago, last (week, month,…), yesterday,… 2. Structure (+) Affirmative: S + V2 /Ved (-) Negative: S + didn’t + V (bare infinitive) (?) Interrogative: Did + S + V (bare infinitive)…? Answer: Yes, S + did/ No, S + didn’t Notes:Tobe * I/ She/ He + was * We/ You/ They + were. a) Irregular verbs INFINITIVE be eat have give go see send take teach think buy cut make do drink get put tell keep leave read meet b) Regular verbs. PAST was/were ate had gave went saw sent took taught thought bought cut made did drank got put told kept left read met. MEANING thì, là, ở ăn có, sở hữu cho, đưa cho đi nhìn thấy gửi cầm, lấy dạy nghĩ mua cắt, chặt chế tạo, làm làm uống có được đặt, để bảo, kể giữ rời khỏi, rời bỏ đọc gặp.

(2) 1. Thêm –d vào sau các động từ tận cùng bằng –ee hoặc –e Ex: live - lived, agree - agreed, etc 2. Thêm –ed vào các động từ còn lại: Work - worked, learn – learned - Tuy nhiên chúng ta cần chú ý như sau: a. Đối với các động từ một vần, tận cùng bằng một nguyên âm + một phụ âm (trừ h, w, x, y), chúng ta phải gấp đôi phụ âm trước khi thêm –ed: Ex: fit -fitted, stop - stopped, etc. Nhưng: stay ( stayed (vì tận cùng là phụ âm y), work ( worked (vì tận cùng là 2 phụ âm rk), heat ( heated (vì tận cùng là 2 nguyên âm ea) b. Đối với động từ có 2 vần có dấu nhấn ở vần cuối cùng và vần này có cấu tạo âm như trường hợp (a) nói trên, chúng ta cũng phải gấp đôi phụ âm trước khi thêm –ed: Ex: pre’fer -preferred, per’mit - permitted, etc. c. Động từ tận cùng bằng phụ âm –y, ta chia ra làm 2 trường hợp: - trước y là một phụ âm, ta biến y thành i trước khi thêm –ed: study ( studied (phát âm –ied là /id/) - trước y là một nguyên âm, ta thêm –ed bình thường: play -played -------------------------------------------Period 2 THE PAST SIMPLE TENSE (Cont.) I. Objectives 1. Knowledge:Help students use the past simple tense correctly. 2. Skills: writinng 3. Education: Not available II. Grammar 1. How to add -ED (regular verbs)(review) We have many ways to add –ED to the regular verbs to make their past form. + Just add ED: play – played watch - watched listen – listened + Double the final consonant if there is a vowel before it: stop - stopped fit – fitted * travel – travelled (also traveled) + Change Y to I if the verb ends with Y and there is a consonant before it: fly – flied study – studied try – tried But enjoy - enjoyed + Just add D: love – loved like – liked 2. How to pronounce -ED - Is pronounced /t/ when the verbs end with: sh, ch, k, p, ss, x, c, ge, ce, th (θ) Ex: watched, stopped, looked, kissed,… - Is pronounced / id/ when the verbs end with: t, d.

(3) Ex: wanted, needed, fitted,… - Is pronounced /d/ for all other cases Ex: learned, studied, played,… Exercise: Put the verbs in the right column. arrived, looked, rented, talked, decided, learned, helped, remembered, returned, borrowed, fitted /-t/ /-id/ /-d/ … … … Answer: /-t/ looked talked helped. /-id/ rented decided fitted. /-d/ arrived learned remembered returned borrowed. Date: 13/1/2012 Group head’s signature. Nguyen Van Dau.

(4) Tran Van Thoi secondary school Đề khảo sát chất lượng đầu năm 2012-2013 Name:.................................. Thời gian 15’ Class:......7A........... Môn: Tiếng Anh. Marks. Comments. I/. Comple the passage with the words on the box. (3 m) friends up television music newspaper to work Andrew gets (1)……..……. at seven every morning. he has a cup of coffee and takes a train (2)………………… . He usually reads the (3)………….…. on the train. . He works from nine to five. In the evening, Andrew listen to (4) …………. .or watch (5)……….. …..at home. Sometimes he goes out with his (6) ………………… . II/. Answer the questions(4m) 1. How far is it from your house to school? …………………………………………………….. 2. Do you like your school? ……………………………………………………… 3. What’s your family name? ………………………………………………………. 4. What’s your name? ……………………………………………………… 5. Where do you live? ..................................................................................... 6. How do you go to school? ..................................................................................... 7. How old are you? ..................................................................................... ANSWER KEY: I/. Complete the passage with the words on the box. (3 m) 0.5 mark for each right answer 1. up 2. to work 3. newspaper 4. music 5. television 6. friends. II/. Answer the questions. I.0 mark for each right answer I.1 students’answer..

(5) Week: 1 Period: 1. INTRODUCING HOW TO LEARN ENGLISH. II. Objectives: -Knowledge : Help students (Ss) know more about English and review some main grammar points of English 6. -Skills : listening, speaking very less reading and writing - Education : review some main grammar points of English 6. What Ss prepare for this subject. II. Language content 1. Grammar: Present simple tense. Present progressive tense Future 2. Vocabulary: vocabulary had learnt in English III. Techniques Asking and answering, give a speech. IV. Teaching aids: Aiding boarbs, pictures. V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and checking attendance: 2- Review of the previous lesson:. 3- New lesson: Teacher’s and students’ activities * Warm up : T greets and asks some questions. Ss listen and answer. * Revision: T asks ss to review of the present simple tense Ss notice. T has ss make examples. Ss do as T asks. T corrects if necessary. Ss copy down.. Content - Good morning. How are you today? - What time do you get up? - What time do you go to school? I. Revision 1. Present simple tense a) To be I am We/You/They are He/She/It is b) ordinary verbs I/We/You/They +V (bare infinitive) He/She/It + V-s/es T has ss give the form of present 2. Present progressive tense. progressive tense. I am Ss answer. We/You/They are V-ing T has ss give examples. He/She/It is Ss make sentences T corrects Ss copy down..

(6) T says a situation then say about “Future” Ss listen then copy down. T asks questions about “going to” Ss answer T corrects * T says what ss repare for this Subjects Ss listen and remind. 3. Future: going to I am We/You/They are V He/She/It is infinitive). going to + (bare -. II. Requirement: - Each student must have tools, a textbook , two notebooks ( one is used at home , the other is used in class) - Preparing the lesson before going to class. Learning the new words, structures … after a lesson. - Have some papers to do exercises in 5 minutes. 4 - Consolidation: Use the correct form of the verbs: 1) I often (walk) ……………. to school. 2) Don’t (waste) …………….. water. 3. Mr. Thanh (watch) …………..TV now. 4. We are going to (visit) ………….. Can Tho next week. (visit) The answer: 1. walk 2. waste 3. is watching 4. visit 5- Homework: Review of some main grammar points of English 6 and prepare Unit 1. A1,2.. Week: 1 Period: 2. UNIT 1. BACK TO SCHOOL A. FRIENDS (1,2). I. Objectives: Knowledge : By the end of the lesson,the students will be able to greet and self-introduce. Skills : listening, speaking very less reading and writing Education: To make the students have good greetings with their friends. II. Language content 1. Grammar : the way to greet others 2.Vocabulary: words relating to greeting and introduction. III. Techniques: Asking and answering, playing the roles, reading, work in pairs. IV. Teaching aids: Aiding boarbs, pictures, smart pen V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and checking attendance: 2- Review of the previous lesson:.

(7) - Introduce oneself and greet others. - Answer: Do you like studying English? How do you go to school?. 3- New lesson: Teacher’s and students’ activities Content * Warm up : - How is your summer vacation ? T asks ss some questions about their - What do you often do during the summer holiday vacation ? - Do you want to meet your teachers and friends after the vacation ? - What do you say when you meet them again ? Ss listen and answer 1. Listen. Then practice with a partner T introduces the lesson. * Presentation: T asks students to look at pictures and * Notes: to describe who they are in the pictures - classmate (n) , explanation - Nice to see/ meet you then guesss what they say - Nice to see/ meet you again Ss answer T lets ss listen to the dialogue between - also(adv) - Nice to meet you, too Ba, Nga and Nam, Hoa once or twice. - I’m in class 7A Ss listen I’m in class 7A, too. (So am I) T elicits new words and structures. Ss copy down. T guides to read. Ss following the teacher. T plays the tape and asks ss to listen to * Practice: the tape Students listen and repeat after the tape T asks ss to practice the dialogue in pairs Ss work in pairs T corrects ss’ mistakes T asks some pairs to perform in front of 2. Read. Then answer the questions * Pre-reading: the class then corrects. New words: - still (adv), explanation - parents (n), picture T has ss look at the pictures then asks - different (adj) , give example Ss answer + How many schools are there in the - unhappy (adj) , antonym (#happy) - miss (v) , nhớ, nhớ nhung picture? - why(adv) tại sao + Which school is bigger ? T elicits new words, explains and -because( conj) bởi vì EX: Her new school is bigger than her old guides to read school. Ss listen and do as T asks Comparatives: S1 + be + short –adj + er + than + S2.

(8) * While-reading: T asks ss to listen and to read the text Ss read the text silently T has ss read the text aloud Ss read the text aloud T corrects T has ss read the questions and answer Ss read the text again and answer the questions in pairs Ss compare there answers in pairs T has ss ask and answer before the class Ss ask and answer, T corrects. The answer: a. She is from Hue b. She is staying with her uncle and aunt. c. No, she doesn’t have any friends in Ha Noi. d. Her new school is bigger than her old school. e. She is unhappy because she misses her parents and her friends.. - T gives correct answers - T asks students to write the answers in their notebooks. * Post-reading: T asks - Is this your new school? Ss answre - Do you have a lot of friends? 4- Consolidation * Reviewing how to greet people *Choose the best option: - My school is ………. than her school. (small, smaller, the smallest)) - I have some friends. I don’t have ………friends. ( much, many, any) - Hoa’s new school is big. There are ………students. (a lot of, some, much) 5- Homework Learn the word by heart, reading the text again.Do A1, 2 pages 3, 4 (workbook) Prepare A3, 4, 5 at pages 12, 13 in English 7. Week: 1 Period: 3. UNIT 1. BACK TO SCHOOL A. FRIENDS (3,4,5). I. Objectives: Knowledge : By the end of the lesson,the students will be able to greet and say naturally in conversation by using the pattern sentences.Moreover, they will be able to listen comprehension about one conversation and rearrange it in the correct order. Skills:Developing speaking, listening, and writing skills. Education : +To make the students have good greetings with their friends. II. Language content 1. Grammar: - the way to greet others. 2. Vocabulary: Words relating to greetings III. Techniques: Asking and answering, playing the roles, reading,work in pairs, listening and ordering the pictures..

(9) IV. Teaching aids: Aiding boarbs, pictures, smart pen V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and checking attendance: 2- Review of the previous lesson: - Two students greet each other. - Ask and answer about Hoa. Make a sentence with unhappy, miss. 3- New lesson: Teacher’s and students’ activities * Warm up: T asks students some questions about greetings. Ss answer. T uses the picture to introduce the dialogue and explains about greeting in different ages. Ss listen T plays the tape. Students listen to the tape and repeat. T asks ss to practice the dialogue in pairs. Ss practice the dialogue in pairs. T calls some pairs perform in font of class. Content - Hello, An. How are you? 3. Listen. Then practice with a partner. * Presentation:. 4. Listen. Complete these dialogues. *Pre-listening: New words T asks if the ss understand the phrases in -will begin(v) sẽ bắt đầu the box. T explains if necessary. - hurry( v) vội, vội vàng Ss answer - How is everything? - Just fine. - Not bad. - Pretty good. - Me,too *While-listening: T plays the tape and asks ss to listen to it (one by one) and to choose the best answers. Ss listen and complete the dialogues. The answer T plays the tape one more time and asks a) ss to check their answers. Mr. Tan : Hello, Lien. How are you? Ss listen to the tape and check the Miss Lien: Pretty good, thank you. How answers with a partner. about you, Tan? Mr. Tan : Not bad, but I’m very busy. Miss Lien: Me, too. b) Nam: Good afternoon, Nga. How is everything? Nga: Ok, thanks. How are you today, Nam? Nam: Just fine, thanks..

(10) Nga: I’m going to the lunch room. Nam: Yes, so am I. *Post -listening: T gives correct ones. Ss copy down. T has ss play the roles Ss play the roles T corrects *Pre-listening: T has ss describe the pictures Ss answer T elicits how to do Ss listen. 5. Listen. Write the letters of the dialogues in the order you hear. *While-listening: T plays the tape and asks ss to listen to the tape. Ss listen to the tape T asks ss to look at the pictures and to Answer: listen to the tape again to write the letters c – b – d – a in the order Ss listen and write the letters in the order then compare the answer with a partner. *Post -listening: T calls some ss to give the answers Ss give the answers. T gives the correct answers Ss copy the answers. 4. Consolidation Having some pairs of students ask and answer about greetings. 5. Homework Doing part A3,4 again, preparing section B1,2..

(11) Week: 2 Period: 4. Signature (Week 1). UNIT 1. BACK TO SCHOOL B. NAMES AND ADDRESSES (1). Trần Quốc Hương I. Objectives: Knowledge- Ss will be able to ask for and to give personal information. Skills:- Developing speaking, listening, reading and writing skills. Education: - To make the students care arounding people. II. Language content * Grammar: - the way to greet others. * Vocabulary: Words relating to greetings, personal information. III. Techniques Asking and answering, listening, playing the roles, work in pairs. IV. Teaching aids: Aiding boarbs, pictures, smart pen V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and checking attendance: 2- Review of the previous lesson: - Greeting . - Write 4 questions and 4 answers to asking the health.. 3- New lesson: Teacher’s and students’ activities Content * Warm up : “START WITH THE TAGS” T asks Ss to play games Put the words in three groups. T asks students to look at picture and Classroom, father, market, sister, mother, introduces the situation: museum, teacher, brother, zoo, student. - Who are they in the picture? 1.School:…………………………. - What is the teacher doing? 2.Family:…………………………. - What are the students doing? 3.Places:………………………….. Ss answer T elicits new words 1. Listen. Then practice with a partner. Ss listen and do as T asks * Presentation: T guides to read and has ss read again Vocabulary: Ss read and T corrects T plays the tape and asks ss to repeat. Ss listen to the tape and repeat. T asks ss to read the questions and answer them in pairs Ss read the questions and answer them in pairs T calls some pairs of ss to practice asking and answering the questions in front of class. Ss: pair-work.. - family name : ( explanation) = surname (n) give example - middle name /,midl'neim/ : tên đệm (chữ lót) (first name: tên) - what(adj) -who(pron) -which(adj).

(12) T corrects ss’ mistakes.. -where(adv) * Practice:. T has ss ask for and give personal information Ss ask and answer in pairs. T corrects. The answer a. Hoa is talking to Miss Lien. b. Hoa’s/Her family name is Pham. c. Her middle name is Thi. d. She lives at 12 Tran Hung Dao Street. * Free – practice: 4 - Consolidation: Complete the information yourself: Family name ( surname):…………………………………………………... Middle name:………………………………………………………………. Age:……………………………………………………………………...... Home address:…… …………………………………………………… 5- Homework: Review of B1, - Do exercise B 1, 2 pages 5, 6 (workbook) and prepare Unit 1, B2,4. Week: 2 Period: 5. UNIT 1. BACK TO SCHOOL B. NAMES AND ADDRESSES (2,4). I. Objectives Knowledge:- Ss will be able to ask for and to give personal information. Skills:- Developing speaking, listening, reading and writing skills. Education: - To make the students care arounding people. II. Language content 1.Grammar : - How far is it from … to …? How do/does +S+V…..? 2.Vocabulary: III. Techniques: Asking and answering, playing the roles, reading, writing, listening, work in pairs. IV. Teaching aids: Aiding boarbs, pictures, smart pen V. Procedures:.

(13) 1- Greeting and checking attendance: 2- Review of the previous lesson: - Middle name, family name, live, street, aunt … - Ss make question with What, Who, Where, How old. 3- New lesson: Teacher’s and students’ activities * Warm up : T asks ss some questions about their holiday Ss listen and answer T introduces the lesson. T asks ss to list some question words. Ss give some question words (Who, Where, What, How) T asks ss to read the dialogue and to complete the blanks with Wh-questions. Ss read the dialogue and to complete the blanks with Wh-questions. T has ss give the answer. Ss give the answer. T asks ss to read the dialogue. Ss read the dialogue in pairs. T corrects ss’ mistakes. T asks ss to complete the dialogue in their notebooks.. Content. 2. Write. Complete the dialogue. * Pre-writing: - what(adj) -who(pron) -which(adj) -where(adv) * While-reading: Answer: Who, Who, What, Where, Where, How * Post-writing:. T has ss look at the pictures then asks. Ss answer. T elicits new words, explains and guides to read. 4. Listen. Then practice with a partner. Ss listen and do as T asks. - Where are they? - Where are they going to do? T asks ss to listen and practice in pairs. - How do they go to school? Ss practice in pairs. * Presentation: T has ss play the roles. Ss play the roles to read before the class. Vocabulary T corrects. - far (adj) , explanation - kilometer (n) , give example T has ss ask the distances of their classmates. * How far: ( Asking about distances) Ss ask and answer. How far is it from… to …? T corrects. It’s … * Free – practice:.

(14) 4- Consolidation: Ss practice asking and answering about distances and means of transport. 5- Homework Learn the word by heart, reading the text again, do exercise B3– p6 - exercise book amd, prepare Unit 1, B 5,6. Week: 2 Period: 6. UNIT 1. BACK TO SCHOOL B. NAMES AND ADDRESSES (5,6). I. Objectives: Knowledge : + By the end of the lesson,the students will be able to ask and answer about the distance of two places and review them the way of asking and answering how people go to somewhere. Skills:- Developing speaking, listening, reading and writing skills. Education: + To make the students care arounding people. II. LANGUAGE KNOWLEDGE II. Language content 1. Grammar: - How far is it from … to …? 2. Vocabulary: still, recess, at recess, stamp, meter, center, to take a bus, letter, pocket, post, kilometer. III. Techniques: Asking and answering, reading, listening,work in pairs. IV. Teaching aids: Aiding boarbs, pictures, smart pen. V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and checking attendance: 2- Review of the previous lesson: Play the roles the dialogue 4 Ss answer the questions: - How does Hoa go to school? - Where does Hoa live? - How far is it from Hoa’s house to school? Answer: - How do you go to school? - Where do you live? - How far is it from your house to school?. 3- New lesson: Teacher’s and students’ activities * Warm up: T asks students some questions. Ss answer.. Content - How do you go to school?. - How far is it from your hose to school? T draws a straight line to illustrate the 5. Ask and answer with a partner distance between 2 places then asks: * Presentation:.

(15) How far is it from school to school? Ss answer: It’s … T reviews of Meter, kilometer Ss take notes T asks ss to practice asking and answering the questions in pairs. Ss work in pairs. (using pictures in the textbook) T gives correct ones. Ss copy down the questions and the answer.. T has ss describe the pictures Ss answer T elicits how to do Ss listen T plays the tape and asks ss to listen to the tape. Ss listen to the tape T asks ss to look at the pictures and to listen to the tape again to write the letters in the order Ss listen and write the letters in the order then compare the answer with a partner. T calls some ss to give the answers Ss give the answers. T gives the correct answers Ss copy the answers.. How far is it from you house to school? It’s … Suggested answer: How far is it from your house to the market? It’s … How far is it from your house to the movie theater? It’s … How far is it from your house to the post office? It’s … How far is it from your house to the bus stop? It’s … 6. Listen and write *Pre-listening: New words: still(adv) vẫn còn recess(n) giờ nghỉ giải lao at recess: vào giờ giải lao stamp(n) tem thư meter(n) mét center(n) trung tâm to take a bus: đón xe buýt letter(n) lá thư pocket(n) gói post(v) gửi kilometer(n) kí lô mét. *While-listening: The answer: a. School to Lan’s house: 300meters. b. Lan’s house to post office: 700 meters. c. School to movie theater: 3 kilometers. d. movie theater to post office: 2 kilometers. *Post -listening:.

(16) 4. Consolidation Remind ss of the structure: How far is it from…….to…..? Practice asking the answering about How far. 5. Homework: - Do exercise B4, 5 page 7 (workbook) - Prepare unit 2, A 1,2. signature (Week 2 ). Trần Quốc Hương.

(17) Week: 3 Period: 7. UNIT 2. PERSONAL INFORMATION A. TELEPHONE NUMBERS (1,2). I. Objectives: Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson,the students will be able to ask and answer about the telephone numbers of them and their friends,and recognize the correct phone number through listening task. Skills:- Developing speaking, listening, reading and writing skills. Education: - To make the students care arounding people. II. Language content 1. Grammar: present simple tense 2. Vocabulary: numbers. III. Techniques Asking and answering, listening, reading and writing, work in pairs. IV. Teaching aids: Aiding boarbs, pictures, smart pen. V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and checking attendance: 2- Review of the previous lesson: Answer 4 questions with: How far, then write one question and the answer. 3- New lesson: Teacher’s and students’ activities * Warm up : T shows a telephone then ask some questions Ss listen and answer. T introduces about the lesson. * Presentation: T asks students to look at the book then identify what it is. Ss answer T elicits new words and how to read numbers Ss listen and do as T asks T guides to read and has ss read again Ss read and T corrects * Practice: T has ss read the telephone numbers Ss read T corrects T has ss work in pairs Ss: pair-work. T corrects ss’ mistakes. * Free – practice: T asks Ss answer T corrects. *Pre-listening:. Content - What’s this? - Do you have a telephone at home? 1. Read. * Notes: - Telephone directory (using real object): danh bạ điện thoại - 11 = one one/ double one; - 00 = zero zero Practice with a partner. Say the telephone number for these people. S1: Dao Van An S2: 7 345 610. Read your telephong numbers. 2. Listen and wirte the telephone numbers.

(18) T suggests how to do Ss listen *While-listening: T plays the tape and asks ss to listen to the tape. Ss listen to the tape T asks ss to look at the pictures and to listen to the tape again to write the telephone numbers Ss listen and write the telephone numbers T has ss compare the answer in pairs Ss compare the answer in pairs. Answer: *Post -listening: a. 8 251 654 d. 8 351 793 T calls some ss to give the answers b. 8 250 514 e. 8 237 041 Ss give the answers. c. 8 521 936 f. 8 821 652 T gives the correct answers Ss copy the answers. 4 - Consolidation: Remind ss of how to read telephone number: - Nomally: 896 234 - Especially: 8 963 322, 8 355 900 5. Homework Practice reading telephone numbers, do A1, 2 – p.8, and prepare A3,4. Week: 3 Period: 8. UNIT 2. PERSONAL INFORMATION A. TELEPHONE NUMBERS (3,4). I. Objectives: Knowledge : + By the end of the lesson,the students will be able to ask and answer about the telephone numbers of them and their friends,make an arrangement and form the simple future tense. Skills:- Developing speaking, listening, reading and writing skills. Education: + To make the students know how to make an arrangement. II. Language content 1.Grammar : The future simple tense. Would you like …? 2.Vocabulary: will, meet, tomorrow III. Techniques: Asking and answering, playing the roles, reading, writing, listening , work in pairs. IV. Teaching aids: Aiding boarbs, pictures, smart pen V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and checking attendance: 2- Review of the previous lesson: * Ss read some telephone numbers: 869 075.

(19) 895 333 012 100 * Write new word: Telephone directory, 8 233 657. 3- New lesson: Teacher’s and students’ activities * Warm up : T asks ss some questions Ss listen and answer T corrects ang introduce the lesson.. Content - Do you often talk with someone on the phone? - Do you know the question asking for telephone numbers? - Do you know how to give your telephone niumber to others? * Pre- listening: 3. Listen T has ss guess Hoa’s telephone Notes: number. - I will call you soon: Không bao lâu nữa Ss guess mình sẽ gọi cho bạn * While- listening: T plays the tape and asks students to listen (books closed). Ss listen to the tape (books closed). T asks ss if they can hear Hoa’s telephone number and the question that Lan asks Hoa. Ss answer Teacher plays the tape the second time Ss listen to the tape. T asks some pairs of ss to practice the dialogue in front of class. Ss work in pairs. Teacher explains the future tense by explaining the meaning of the Follow-up activity sentence: I will call you soon. Suggested questions: T guides to practice. - What’s your name? Ss practice in group of four. - Where do you live? T gives worksheets, and then asks - What’s your telephone number? students to work in group. Now ask your classmates and complete the list. Students ask and answer, then EX: complete the list on page 20. NAME ADDRESS TEL * Post- listening: NUMBERS Teacher has ss read their collection. Lan TVT Town 3897 877 Ss read. T corrects if neccesary. * Presentation: T points to the picture and asks some 4. Listen and read. Then answer the questions questions. S answers. Who are they? T says: “Right. Now listen to the tape Phong and Tam to know more what they say on the “What are they doing?” phone. (books closed). They are talking. Ss listen * Notes:.

(20) T elicits Future smple tense Future simple tense: Ss copy down (+) S + will + V. * Practice: (-) S + will not (won’t) + V T has ss listen (?) Will + S + V? Ss listen and repeat after the tape Yes, S + will / shall (class split in half to play 2 roles No, S+won’t / shan’t (books opened) Notes: I/ we + shall....... T has ss read then asnwer the * Would you like to see a movie? questions Ss read then asnwer in pairs Answer: T has ss ask and answer a. Phong and Tam. Ss ask and answer b. They will see a movie. T corrects c. They will meet at 6.45. * Further practice: d. They’ll meet in front of the movie theater. T has ss work in pairs Ss work in pairs T has ss play the roles before the class Ss play the roles T corrects 4- Consolidation: Make 2 sentences using future simple tense 5- Homework Learn the word by heart, reading the text again, do exercise 5,6 and prepare Unit 2. B 5,6 Week: 3 Period: 9. UNIT 2. PERSONAL INFORMATION A. TELEPHONE NUMBERS (5,6) + test 15 mins. I. Objectives: Knowledge : + By the end of the lesson,the students will be able to ask and answer about the telephone numbers of them and their friends,make an arrangement and form the simple future tense. Skills:- Developing speaking, listening, reading and writing skills. Education: + To make the students know how to make an arrangement. II. Language content 1. Grammar: The simple future tense, Can I speak to Lan? Where should we meet? How will you get there? 2. Vocabulary: - Words relating to talking on the phone III. Techniques: Asking and answering, reading, listening, playing the roles, work in pairs. IV. Teaching aids: Aiding boarbs, pictures, smart pen V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and checking attendance: 2- Review of the previous lesson:.

(21) No checking. 3- New lesson: Teacher’s and students’ activities * Warm up: Playing a games T asks students some questions. - Do you sometimes go to the movie? - How do you say to invite your friend to go to the movies with you? - Do you need to know the place to meet? - How do you get there? Ss answer. *Pre-listening: T suggests how to do Ss listen T has ss guess Ss try to guess *While-listening: T plays the tape and asks ss to listen to the tape. Ss listen to the tape T asks compare the answer with a partner. Ss listen thencompare the answer with a partner. *Post -listening: T calls some ss to give the answers Ss give the answers. T gives the correct answers Ss copy down. * Presentation: T introduces the lesson then has ss listen. Ss listen T elicits some expressions Ss listen and take notes T guides to read Ss follow the teacher * Practice: T has ss listen to the dialogue Ss listen T gives Ss time to read the dialogue. Ss read the dialogue to find the information for the questions. T has ss ask and answer Ss ask and answer * Further -practice:. Content *Jumble Words -ese = see -trast = start -vomei = movie -rehatte = theater -romtroom = tomorrow -atel = late. 5.Listen. Then write the answers. New words: moment(n) Chốc, lát. tell(v)nói, kể, bảo again(adv) lần nửa talk( about)(v) nói về Keys: a. 8 545 545 b. a movie c. Lan's house d. bus. 6. Read. Then answer - Who is calling?: Ai gọi đấy? - Can/Could I speak to……?: Tôi có thể nói chuyện với…..? - I’ll call again: Tôi sẽ gọi lại sau. - To be out: vắng nhà. - To be back: về (nhà). Answer: a. Phong is calling. b. Han is answering the phone. c. They are talking about Lan. d. She will be back at about six o’clock. e. Phong will call her again after six. - Do you often talk on the phone? - Do you like talking o the phone?.

(22) T asks Ss answer.T corrects 4. Consolidation Future simple tense: - He (call) …….. again ( will call) - I (tell)……… her. (will tell) - They (meet)………… at her house. (will meet) 5. Homework: Learn the expressiopns , prepare B 1,2. School:......................................... Name:.......................................... Class............................................ The first fifteenth Test Subject: English Marks. Comment. THE 1ST FIFTEEN - MINUTE TEST I/. Comple the passage with the words on the box. (3 m) friends up television music newspaper to work Anh gets (1)……..……. at seven every morning. he has a cup of coffee and takes a train (2)………………… . He usually reads the (3)………….…. on the train. . He works from nine to five. In the evening, Andrew listen to (4) …………. .or watch (5)……….. …..at home. Sometimes he goes out with his (6) ………………… . II/. Read the passage then answer the questions(4m) 1. How far is it from your house to school? …………………………………………………….. 2. Do you like our school? ……………………………………………………… 3. What’s your family name? ………………………………………………………. 4. What’s your middle name? ……………………………………………………… III. Write the past form of the verds. Verbs go play visit buy take have start. Past form.

(23) give stop call make watch ANSWER KEY: I/. Comple the passage with the words on the box. (3 m) 0.5 mark for each right answer 1. up 2. to work 3. newspaper 4. music II/. answer. II.0mark for each right answer. 5. television 6. friends.. III. Write the past form of the verds Verbs go play visit buy take have start give stop call make watch (7 m) students’ answers. Past form went played visited bought took had started gave stopped called made watched. Signature (week 3). Week 3. Trần Quốc Hương.

(24) Week: 4 Period: 10. UNIT 2. PERSONAL INFORMATION B. MY BIRTHDAY (1,2). I. Objectives: Knowledge - Ss will be able to identify ordinal numbers, listening and write the dates. Skills- Developing listening, reading and writing skill. Education: + To make the students know the importance of time. II. Language content 1. Grammar: present simple tense 2. Vocabulary: ordianal numbers. III. Techniques Asking and answering, listening, reading and writing, work in individual. IV. Teaching aids: Aiding boarbs, smart pen V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and checking attendance: 2- Review of the previous lesson: Play the roles A6 then answer the questions. Make two sentences using future simple tense.. 3- New lesson: Teacher’s and students’ activities Content * Warm up : Bingo T lets ss play a game” bingo” (ss write 9 Student’s sheet (EX) numbers themselves, T reads and ss 3 9 check, if anyone has 3 numbers in 2 any column they will win) 8 1 Ss listen and do as T asks 5 T introduces about the lesson. 6 0 14 * Presentation: 1. Listen and repeat. T asks students to look at the book then Cardinal Ordinal Cardinal listen Number Number number Ss look at the book then listen One First Thirteen T elicits how to write ordinal numbers Two Second Fourteen Ss listen and do as T asks Three Third Fifteen T guides to read and has ss read again Four Fourth Sixteen Ss read and T corrects Five Firth … * Practice: Six Sixth Twenty T has ss read the numbers Seven Seventh Thirty Ss read Eight Eighth Forty T corrects Nine Ninth … … … Ninety Twelve Twelfth 21st, 32nd, 12th, 15th, 30th. Ordinal number Thirteenth Fourteenth Fifteenth Sixteenth … Twentieth Thirtieth Fortieth Fiftieth ... Ninetieth.

(25) * Free – practice: T shows some numbers and asks ss read aloud Ss read T corrects. Ss notice *Pre-listening: T sticks a wall calendar on the board and asks ss: “What is this? Yes. This is a wall calendar”. It is a month. Which month is it? How many dates are there in a month? T suggests how to do Ss listen *While-listening: T plays the tape and asks ss to listen to the tape. Ss listen to the tape Ss listen and write the dates T has ss compare the answer in pairs Ss compare the answer in pairs. T has ss listen once more time Ss listen *Post -listening: T calls some ss to give the answers Ss give the answers. T gives the correct answers Ss copy the answers.. 2. Listen and wirte the dates.. Tape transcript- -Answer: The first of July The nineteenth The sixth The fourteenth The seventeenth The thirty-first. 4 - Consolidation: Write into the number: - the second of July - thirty – eighth - fifty – third - seventy-first 5. Homework Learing numbers, how to write the dates Prepare B 3,4 Week: 4 Period: 11. UNIT 2. PERSONAL INFORMATION B. MY BIRTHDAY (3,4). I. Objectives: Knowledge- Ss will be able to ask for and to give personal information and to know the months..

(26) Skills- - Developing speaking, listening, reading andl less writing skills. Education: To make the students know how to give their personal information to the others well. II. Language content 1.Grammar : The simple present tense. What’s your date of birth? 2.Vocabulary: months, words relating to the topic “My bithday” III. Techniques: Asking and answering, playing the roles, reading, writing, listening, work in pairs. IV. Teaching aids: Aiding boarbs, smart pen V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and checking attendance: 2- Review of the previous lesson: Wrire into the words: 12th, 30th, 22nd, 3rd, 5th Listen and write into the dates: The sixth The fifteenth The seventeenth The thirty-first. 3- New lesson: Teacher’s and students’ activities * Warm up : T asks ss some questions Ss listen and answer T corrects and introduces the lesson. * Pre- writing: T shows a caledar and asks What is it? How many months are there in a year? Ss answer * While- writing: T has ss work individually Ss work individually T has ss compare the answer with a partner Ss compare the answer. * Post- writing: Teacher has ss give the answer. Ss give the answer T corrects if neccesary. * Pre- listening: T introduces the content of the dialogue: “We’re going to listen to a conversation between Hoa and Mr. Tan. Hoa is going to. Content - What’s your name? - What’s your telephone number? - What’s your address? 3. Write the month in order from first to twelfth. January February March April May June July August October September November December. 4. Listen. Then practice with a partner. * Notes:.

(27) attend Mr. Tan’s class. Now, guess what Mr. Tan is going to ask Hoa. (Name, Age, Date of birth, Address,…). Ss listen to the T and guess what Mr. Tan is going to ask Hoa. T plays the tape. Ss listen to the tape. T explains some new words. and guides to read T asks ss to list the questions Mr. Tan asks Hoa. Ss work in groups of two. T plays the tape one or two more time(s). Ss listen to the tape (book closed). * While – listening: T asks ss to practice the dialogue in pairs. And then answer the questions on page 25. Ss: pair-work. T calls some ss to ask and answer the questions in front of class. SS: pair-work. T corrects ss’ answers and gives correct ones. Ss copy the answers. * Post – listening: T asks the questions f,g,h Ss answer. T corrects. - nervous (adj) , give example - worry (v) , translation - worried(adj) - On (prep): vào (nghĩa trong bài) - form(n)mẫu - student registration form: phiếu đăng kí hs * What’s your date of birth?. Answer: a. Hoa is 13 years old. b. She will be 14 on her next birthday. c. Her bitrthday is on June eighth. d. Hoa lives with her uncle and aunt. e. Hoa is worried because she does not have any friends. f. g. h. (Student’s answer).. 4- Consolidation: Ss ask and answer about name, age, date of birth, address, telephon numbers 5- Homework Learn the word by heart, reading the text again and prepare Unit 2. B 6,7 Week: 4 Period: 12. UNIT 2. PERSONAL INFORMATION B. MY BIRTHDAY (6,7)+ test 15’. I. Objectives: Knowledge-Ss will be able to make an appointment on the phone. Skills- Developing listening and speaking skills. Education: To make the students have good relationship with their friends..

(28) II. Language content * Grammar: The simple future tense. * Vocabulary: - Words relating to talking on the phone invite, join, party, hope III. Techniques: Asking and answering, reading, listening, playing the roles, work in pairs. IV. Teaching aids: Aiding boarbs, pictures, smart pen V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and checking attendance: 2- Review of the previous lesson: - Read A4 in pairs. - Ask and answer 4 question. - Ask and answer the telephone numbers. 3- New lesson: Teacher’s and students’ activities * Warm up: T asks students some questions. Ss answer. T corrects if necessary then introduces the lesson. *Pre-reading: T suggests how to do Ss listen T has ss listen to the lesson Ss listen T elicits new words Ss copy down T has ss read then answer the questions Ss answer *While-reading: T has ss read the text again then complete the card Ss read in individual *Post -reading: T calls some ss to give the answers Ss give the answers. T gives the correct answers Ss copy down. T asks one student to read the text again Oone students read T corrects. Content Questions: - When is your birthday? - Do you often hold it every year? - Are you happy? - Who do you often invite to your birthday party ? - How do you invite them ? on the phone or send invitation cards 6. Read. Then complete the card - How old is Lan? - When is her birthday? - Where does she live? - When will the party start? - When will the party finish? New words: invite(v) mời join(v) tham gia party(n) bửa tiệc hope(v) hy vọng. Dear (student’s name), I am having a birthday party on Sunday,.

(29) * Practice: T explains how to do Ss listen T has ss work in individual Ss work in individual T has ss ask and answer Ss ask and answer T corrects. May 25. The party will be at my house at 24 Ly Thuong Kiet Street from 5:00 to 9:00. I hope you will come and join the fun. Love, Lan Tel. 8 674 758 7. Think and write. Imagine you will be a guest at Lan’s birthday party. Students’ answers. 4. Consolidation Ex: I will be 14 on my next birthday I won’t be happy. 5. Homework: - List things in your house or in your room. - Prepare Unit 3, A1. School:......................................... Name:.......................................... Class............................................ The first fifteenth Test.

(30) Subject: English Marks. Comment. I/ Choose the best answer: (3ms) 1…………is his telephone number ? A. When B. What C. Which D. Who 2. …………is her birthday ?- on June eighth A. When B. What C. Which D. Who 3. Will he be free tomorrow? – No,he…………. A. won’t B. will C. doesn’t D. don’t 4. We will ………… our old friend next Sunday . A. to visit B. visit C. visits D. visitting 5. Hoa lives ………… 03/2 Nguyen Hue street. A. on B. at C. in D. of 6. The party will start ……… 11.00 AM. A. on B. at C. in D. of II.Supply the verds into the simple future tense: (4 ms) a) I (be) ………..at her home at 7 o’clock. b) The game (start) ………… at six. c) They (leave) …………..tomorrow. d) He (give) ………………..his sister a present on her birthday. III/ Read the passage carefully, complete Huongi’s invitation below: (3 ms) Mai Huong is fifteen years old. She is a student. She will be 13 on Friday, July 22nd . She will have a party on her birthday. She will invite some friends. She lives at 16 Nguyen Khuyen street. Her telephone number is 01 252 789 567. The party will be at her house at seven o’clock and finish at half past eight in the evening. Dear, Minh. I’m having a birthday party on (2)…………………. The party will be at my house at (3)………………..…. from seven o’clock and finish at half past eight I hope you will come and enjoy it. Love, Huong Tel: (7)…………………………... ANSWER KEY: I/ Choose the best answer: (3ms) - Each correct answer is 0,5m1. B. What;2. A. When;3. A. won’t;4. B. meet;5. B. at;6. B. at II.Supply the verds into the simple future tense: (4 ms).

(31) a) I (be) ………..at her home at 7 o’clock. ( will be) b) The game (start) ………… at six. (will start) c) They (leave) …………..tomorrow. (will leave) d) He (give) ………………..his sister a present on her birthday. (will give) III/ Read the passage carefully, complete Huong’s invitation below: (3ms) - Each correct answer is 1m(1) Friday, April 20th (2) 16 Nguyen Du street (3) 01 252 789 567..

(32) Week: 5 Period: 13. UNIT 3. AT HOME A. WHAT A LOVELY HOME! (1). I. Objectives: Knowledge- Describe room’s homes and make a complaint and give a `complement. Skills- - Developing listening, reading and writing skills WEEK 4: 7/09/2012 Education: To make the students aware of the tidiness and cleaness in their house.. signature. II. Language content * Grammar: : - Preposition of place - Exclamative sentences “What + (a/an) + adj + N * Vocabulary: related to the topic “At home” III. Techniques Asking and answering, listening, reading and writing, work in pairs. IV. Teaching aids: Aiding boarbs, cassette recorder and tape. V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and checking attendance: 2- Review of the previous lesson: Playing the roles A6. Answer the questions. Make two sentences using future simple tense.. 3- New lesson: Teacher’s and students’ activities * Warm up : T asks Ss listen and answer T introduces about the lesson. * Presentation: T asks: What’s in the living room? Ss answer: T. V set chairs, table, flowers, etc. T asks: “What about in the kitchen?” T says: We will listen to a dialogue between Hoa and Lan. They are talking about rooms in Hoa’s house. Now, listen what they say. Ss listen to the tape. Teacher explains some new words before listening. * Practice: T plays the tape. Students listen to the dialogue once or twice.. Content - Is your house big? - How many rooms are there in your house? - What are there? 1. Listen. Then practice with a partner. 1. * New words: + awful (adj) + comfortable (adj) + bright (adj) + tub (n) + amazing (adj) + dryer (n) + dishwasher (n) * Exclamation: “What a/ an + adj + N !” Complaints : + What an awful day ! Compliments : What a bright room! Answer: a. The living room, Hoa’s (bed) room, the bath room, and the kitchen..

(33) Students listen and read after the tape. b. Because it is bright and it has nice (Class split in halt to play 2 roles) colors: pink and white. Students work in pairs (practicing the c. A sink, a tub, and a shower. dialogue in pairs and answering the d. A washing machine, a dryer, a questions on page 30) refrigerator., a dish washer, and an electric T asks ss to pay the roles befoere the stove. class Ss play the roles About you: T corrects e. f. Students’ answers * Free – practice: T ask ss to work in pair “ About you” Ss ask and answer and T corrects * Pre- writing: 2. Write exclamations T has ss remind the structure to make a - Complaint (n) , explanation complaint and compliment - Compliment (n) , explanation Ss answer - expensive (adj), give example T elicits new words - awful (adj), translation Ss copy down - wet (adj), real object T guides to read - boring (ad), translation Ss follow the teacher * Function of “Exclamative sentences”: is * While- writing: to make compliments or complains. T has ss work individually Answer: Ss work individually a) Complaints T has ss compare the answer with a (1) What an awful restaurant! partner (2) What a wet day! Ss compare the answer (3) What a boring party! T has ss give the answer (4) What a bad movie! Ss give the answer b) Compliments T corrects (1) What a great party! * Post- writing: (2) What a bright room! Teacher has ss read (3) What an interesting movie! Ss read T corrects if neccesary. 4 - Consolidation: T shopws some pictures of rooms and has ss make complaints and compliments 5- Homework: Review of the lesson and prepare Unit 3 A 2. Week: 5 Period: 14. UNIT 3. AT HOME B. HOA’S FAMILY (1). I. Objectives: Knowledge-Ss will be able to talk about occupations, to ask and to answer about occupations.

(34) Skills- Developing listening, speaking, reading and speaking skills. Education: To make Ss love their work II. Language content * Grammar:. + What + do/does + S + do? + Where + do/does + S + work? * Vocabulary: - Words relating to the topic “At home” III. Techniques: Asking and answering, reading, listening, playing the roles, work in pairs. IV. Teaching aids: Aiding boarbs, pictures, cassette recorder and tape. V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and checking attendance: 2- Review of the previous lesson: - Say the position of things in the class room. - Go to the BB and write two exclamative sentences.. 3- New lesson: Teacher’s and students’ activities * Warm up: T asks students some questions. Ss answer. T corrects if necessary then introduces the lesson. Content - What is your name? - Are you a pupil? - How many people are there in your family? - What is your father’s job? - My father/ He is a worker/ farmer - How about your mother?. *Presentation: T plays the tape. Ss listen to the tape. Teacher asks ss if there are difficult or new words and explains them if there are any. T elicits new words Ss copy down T guides to read Ss follow the teacher * Practice: T has ss listen to the dialogue Ss listen T has ss work in pairs Ss work in pairs T has ss play the roles Ss play the roles T corrects T has ss read then answer the questions Ss answer T has ss ask and answer Ss ask and answer T corrects. 1. Listen. Then practice with a partner. -farm(n) explaination - grow (v) picture - cattle (n) give a list - housework (n) picture - housewife(n) explanation Answer: a. He is a farmer. b. He works on his farm. c. She is a housewife. d. She does the housework and she helps on the farm. e. Yes, they are. (Because they love working on their farm.) f. She is 8..

(35) *Further practice: T has ss ask and answer about their father’s job Ss ask and answer. T corrects 4. Consolidation Talk about Hoa’s family and your family 5. Homework: - Read the dialogue, learn all new words by heard and do exercises B1 on page 15. - Prepare B2, 3 ..................................................... Week: 5 Period :15 15115. UNIT 3. AT HOME B. HOA’S FAMILY (2,3). I. Objectives: -Knowledge:Ss will be able to talk about occupations and places of work, to ask and to answer about occupations -Skills: Developing listening, speaking, reading and writing skills. - Education: To make the students love their country and their jobs. II. Language content * Grammar- The simple present tense to ask and answer occupations and places of work (review) + What + do/ does + S + do? + S + be + noun of job + Where + do/does + S + work? + S + work(s) + Adv of place - The simple present tense to ask and give personal information (review) * Vocabulary: related to the topic “At home” III. Techniques Asking and answering, listening, reading and writing. IV. Teaching aids: Aiding boarbs, smart pen. V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and checking attendance: 2- Review of the previous lesson: Ss go to the board and practice the dialogue about Hoa’s family ̣ (p 33) Ss write new words: grow, cattle, housework. Ss answer the questions: What is Hoa’s father’s job? ( a farmer) Where does he work? ( on the farm) What does Hoa’s mother’s job? ( a housewife) What does she do every day? ( does the housework and helps on the farm). 3- New lesson: Teacher’s and students’ activities. Content.

(36) * Warm up : T asks ss talk about their family Ss listen and talk abouttheir family T introduces about the lesson. * Presentation: T plays the tape. Ss listen to the tape/ teacher twice and prepare to answer about Lan’s family, what her parents do. T explains new words and reviews the structures. * Practice: T plays the tape. Ss listen to the tape / teacher again. T asks ss to practice in individual then work pairs: ask and answer about Lan’s family. Ss practice in individual then work in pairs(asking and answering in pairs about Lan’s family. T follows then corrects * Free – practice: T ask ss to work in pair “ About you” Ss ask and answer and T corrects. 2. Read. * New words: - primary (school): explantion - journalist (n), picture * Now practice with a partner a)EX: - What do her father do? - He is a doctor. - Where do he work? - He works in a hospital. ..... * About you : - Where does your father work? He works in … … - What does he do? He is a/an … 3. Match these half-sentences. The answer: + A farmer works on a farm. + A doctor takes care of sick people + A journalist writes for a newspaper + A teacher teaches in a school. T asks ss to read B3 and prepare to match this half – sentences. Ss read B3 and prepare to match this half – sentences. T explains new words and guides how to do exercise. Ss do exercise T corrects 4 - Consolidation: * Questions – Answers: - T asks a pair of Ss to ask and to answer about occupations and places of work. - T corrects and reviews the structure. 5. Homework: - Do exercise B1/ exercise book/ page 15, prepare Unit 3. B 4,5 Week 5. signature: 14/9/2012.

(37) ………………………………………………………………………………………………… … Week: 6 Period: 16. UNIT 3. AT HOME A. HOA’S FAMILY (4). I. Objectives: -Knowledge:Ss will be able to talk about personal information, and future plan. -Skills: listening, reading, very less speaking and writing. - Education: To make Ss choose the most suitable apartment/house and keep it cleaner II Language content : * Grammar: - The simple present tense (review) *Vocabulary: words relating to the topic “At home” III. Techniques: Asking and answering, reading, writing, listening, individual - work, pair – work, goup- work. IV. Teaching aids: Aiding boarbs, smart pen. V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and checking attendance: 2- Review of the previous lesson: -Read the dialogue - Answer the question: + What does Hoa’s father do? + What does Hoa’s father do? + How old is Hoa’sister? Write the words: farm, countryside, raise, cattle, grow. 3- New lesson: Teacher’s and students’ activities * Warm up : T has ss play games: “ Jumbled words” Ss play games T corrects and introduces the lesson. * Pre- listening: T asks ss about name, age, job, place of work Student answers. T corrects and writes this information on a chart and put it on the board à introduce new lesson. * While- listening:. Content Jumbled words: TOCDOR: TAERCHE: FERMAR: JONAURLITS: NESRU:. 4. Listen. Complete these formsfor the three people on the tape..

(38) T hangs 3 charts (like those ones in textbook) on the board. T introduces the content of listening task and asks Ps to prepare to fill in missing personal information of 3 people in the smart pen. T explains new words if there are. Ss listen to the smart pen twice Ss compare information in groups and pairs. Ss listen to the tape again. Ss last check information in groups and pairs.. New words: -high school: secondary school - magazine(n) realia. Name: Tom Age: 26 Job: teacher Place to work: at a high school Name: Susan Age: 19 Job: journalist Place to work: for a magazine * Post- listening: Name: Bill Teacher has ss give the answer Age: 20 Ss give the answer Job: nurse T corrects if neccesary, then has ss Place to work: in a hospital introduces one of three people. TAPE TRANSCRIPTION Tom is a teacher. He is 26 years old and teaches at a high school. Susan is 19 and writes for a magazine. Bill is 20 and he is a nurse. He works in a hospital. 4- Consolidation: Ss talk about themselves. 5- Homework Learn the words by heart, practice reading the dialogue and prepare B5.. ………………………………………………………………………………………………… UNIT 3. AT HOME Week: 6 A. HOA’S FAMILY (5) Period: 17 I. Objectives: -Knowledge:Ss will be able to talk about personal information, and future plan. -Skills: listening, reading, very less speaking and writing. - Education: To make Ss choose the most suitable apartment/house and keep it cleaner II Language content : * Grammar: - The simple present tense (review) - Comparatives (review), superelatives (review).

(39) *Vocabulary: words relating to the topic “At home” III. Techniques: Asking and answering, reading, writing, listening, individual - work, pair – work, goup- work. IV. Teaching aids: Aiding boarbs, cassette smart pen. V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and checking attendance: 2- Review of the previous lesson: answer the questions: What does yourfather/ mother do? Where does he/ shework?. 3- New lesson: Teacher’s and students’ activities * Warm up : T has ss ask and answer about personal information Ss ask and answer T corrects and introduces the lesson. * Presentation: Teacher asks ss to look at the picture then asks Ss answer T reminds students of some prepositions. Ss take notes Teacher reads the list of words (page 31) and ss repeat * Practice controlled: T has ss work in pairs Ss work in pairs T has some pairs play the roles Ss play the roles T corrects then has ss answer the questions. Ss ask and answer T corrects Ss copy down. * Further practice: T asks Ss answer and T corrects 4- Consolidation: Ss talk about themselves.. Content. 5. Listen and read - What is this? - Who are in the picture? * New words: - apartment (n)căn hộ( BE: flat) - empty (n) trống (nhà chưa có ai ở) - furnished (a): được trang bị đồ đạc, nội thât - suitable (adj) , thich hợp. Answer: a. The one at number 27 b. The one at number 79 c. The one at number 79 d. The one at number 27 The most suitable apartment is the smallest but it is the newest of the three apartments. It has two bedrooms, a large, modern bathroom and a kitchen. - Do you live in a house or in an apartment? - How many rooms are there in your house?.

(40) 5- Homework Learn the words by heart, practice reading the dialogue and prepare Language focus.. Week: 6 Period: 18. LANGUAGE FOCUS. I. Objectives: Knowledge:Remind students of the language knowledge from Unit 1 to Unit 3. Skills: writing, reading very less listening and speaking. Education: To work a plan and love their work II. Language content Present simple tense, Future simple tense Ordinal numbers Prepositions Adjectives Occupations Is there a.....? / Are there any...? Question words * Vocabulary: Words relating to the topics “Back to school, Personal information,At home” III. Techniques: Asking and answering, reading, listening, playing the roles. IV. Teaching aids: Aiding boarbs, pictures, cassette recorder and tape. V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and checking attendance: 2- Review of the previous lesson: No exam. 3- New lesson: Teacher’s and students’ activities T asks ss about Present simple tense. Ss answer. T asks ss to complete the paasages using the verbs in brackets. Ss work in groups of two. T calls some ss to check the aniswers. Ss give the answers in front of class. T corrects.. Content 1. Present simple tense Answer: a) Ba is my friend. He lives in Ha Noi with his mother, father and elder sister. His parents are teachers. Ba goes to Quang Trung School. b) Lan and Nga are in class 7A. They eat lunch together. After school, Lan rides her bike home and Nga catches the T asks ss to read the list of things Nam bus. will/ won’t do tomorrow. 2. Future simple tense Ss to read the list of things Nam will/ Tomorrow won’t do tomorrow. go post office ü call Ba û.

(41) do homework ü tidy yard û see movie ü watch TV û meet Minh û write grandmother ü T explains the example. Example: T asks ss to write the things Nam will/ He will go to the post office, but he won’t do tomorrow in groups of two. won’t call Ba Ss work in pairs. T calls some ss to write the answers on  He will do his homwork, but he the board. won’t tidy the yard. Ss write the answers on the board.  He will see a movie, but he won’t T corrects. watch TV.  He will write to his grandmother, T asks some ss to read ordinal numbers but he won’t meet Minh. from first to fortieth 3. Ordinal numbers T asks ss to write the correct ordinal numbers (on the board by using a poster or in the text book ) Soccer Team Points Position Ss: individual work. Thắng Lợi 26 Fourth T corrects ss’ mistakes. (4) Thành Công 25 Fifth (5) Tiên Phong 23 Sixth T uses the pictures to rimind ss of some (6) prepositions. Đoàn Kết 29 Third T explains the example. (3) T asks ss to write sentences. Hồng Hà 34 Second (2) T corrects. Phương Đông 19 Seventh (7) 36 First (1) Thăng Long T reminds ss of the comparatives and 4. Prepositions superlatives of adjectives. T uses the picture to explain the Example: a) It’s under the table example. b) It’s in front of the chair. c) It’s behind the TV. d) It’s next to the bookcase. e) It’s on the couch. 5. Adjectives Example:  A is a cheap toy.  And B is cheaper. But C is the cheapest. a) St1: A is a cheap toy. St2: And B is cheaper..

(42) But C is the cheapest. b) St1: A is an expensive dress. St2: And B is more expensive. T asks ss to write the dialogues. But C is the most expensive. Ss write the dialogues. c. St1: A is a good student. T calls some ss to check the answers and St2: And B is better. corrects ss’ mistakes. But C is the best. d. St1: A is strong. St2: And B is stronger. But C is the strongest. T explains the example. 6. Occupations. T asks ss to write the people’s job title. a) He fights fires. He is very brave. What Ss write the people’s job title. is his job? T calls some ss to check the answers  He is a fireman. and corrects ss’ mistakes. b) She’s a doctor. c) She’s a teacher. d) He is a farmer. - T explains the example. 7. Is there a...?/ Are there any...? - Ss practice in pairs. Example: Minh: Is there s lamp? Hoa : Yes, there is. Hoa : Are there any pictures? Minh: No, there aren’t. a) Are there any books? - T explains the example. Yes, there are. - Ss practice in pairs. b) Are there any armchairs? No, there aren’t. c) Is there a telephone? No, there isn’t. d) Are there any flowers? Yea, there are. 8. Question words What is his name? His name is Pham Trung Hung. How old will is he? He is twenty five. What is his address? His address is 34 Nguyen Bieu Street, Hai Phong. What is his job?/ What does he do?/ What is he? He is an office manager 4. Consolidation SS introduce personal information 5. Homework: Prepare a 45-minute test.

(43) Week 6. signature.

(44) Week: 7 Period: 18*. REVISION. I. Objectives: Knowledge:Ss will be able to do exercises about present simple tense, simple future tense, comparatives, superlatives, there ie/are, exclamation and question words. Skills: writing, reading very less listening and speaking. Education: To make a compliment. II. Language content * Grammar: Present simple tense, simple future tense, comparatives, superlatives, there is /are, exclamtion and question words. * Vocabulary: related to the topic “Back to school, Personal information,At home” III. Techniques Asking and answering, listening, reading and writing. IV. Teaching aids: Aiding boarbs, cassette recorder and tape. V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and checking attendance: 2- Review of the previous lesson: Not exam. 3- New lesson: Teacher’s and students’ activities * Warm up : Playing a game : write first to tenth T introduces about the lesson. * Practice: T write the exrcise 1 then has ss do it Ss work in individual T has ss compare the answer Ss compare the answer T has ss give the answer Ss give the answer T corrects Ss copy down. T suggests how to do exrcise 2 Ss work in individual T has ss compare the answer Ss compare the answer. Content. 1. Supply the corrects form of the verbs a) That is Hoa. She (be)………. a serious student. b) She slways (study) ……….hard to please her parents. c) She ( not, go) ……… to school late. She (be, always) ………. on time. d) Mai often (help) ………. her friend at school. e) She (also, corrects) ……….. homework for them at the moment. f) I (send) ……..my friend this gift tomorrow. The answer: a) is b) studies c) does not go , is always d) helps e) is also correcting f) will send 2. Choose the best option a). ……….. a nice day! ( what, How, Where) b). He is ……….in his family. (young,.

(45) T has ss give the answer Ss give the answer T corrects Ss copy down. T gives the questions Ss try to answer T has ss ask and answer Ss ask and answer T correct Ss write the answer. younger, the youngest) c). Mr. Binh……to work by bus. (go, goes, to go) d). …any books on the shelf? – Yes, there are. (Are there, Is there, Are they) e) Your house is ........... than mine. (tall, taller, the tallest) f). This toy is….…than that one. (expensive, more expensive, most expensive) The answer: a) What b) the youngest c) goes d) Are there e) taller f) more expensive 3. Answer: a) What do you do? b) What is your telephone number? c) Is there a livingroom in your house? d) What is your date of birth? The answer: Students’ answer. 4 - Consolidation: Talk about yourself 5. Homework: Prepare for the 45 - minute test. Week: 7 Period: 19. THE FIRST ENGLISH TEST. I. Objectives: Checking students’ knowledge from Unit 1 to Unit 3. o Listening: Listen and complete some information about Lan’s family. o Reading: Read a passage about Minh’s family. Then check the statements and answer the questions. o Writing: Write about the dates in the way we talk. II Language content : * Grammar: Present simple tense, Future simple tense Ordinal numbers Prepositions Adjectives.

(46) Occupations Is there a.....? / Are there any...? Question words * Vocabulary: Words relating to the topics “Back to school, Personal information,At home”. II. Matrix Chủ đề Language focus Reading. Nhận biết TN TL. Thông hiểu TN TL. Vân dụng TN TL. 10. 10 2.5. 2. 2.5 4. 0.5. 6 2.0. 2.5 5. Writing Listening. Tổng. 10 2.5. 5. 2.5 5. 2.5. III. Questions The 1st FORTY – FIVE – MINUTE TEST I/. LANGUAGE FOCUS Circle the best option A, B, C or D(3.05m) 1.Nice-----see you. A.to B.for C.in D.on 2.I’m in class 7A.------am I. A.So B.Too C.Either D.Neither 3.------is your family name? A.How B.Which C.What D.Where 4.------do you live ? A.Where B.What C.Which D.Who 5.How-----are you? A.age B.eld C.old D.olds 6.-------is your middle name? A.Where B.Which C.What D. When 7.How---is it from your house to school? A.near B.far C. long D.tall 8.-----do you go to school? A.What B.Where C.How D.Which 9.----is your telephone number? A.How B.What C.When D.Where 10.What is your-----of birth? A.date B.day C.dates D.days 11.What-----awful day! A.a B.an C.the D. 0 12.There------a table. A.is B.are C.am D.be II/. READING Read the passage carefully(2.0m):. 2.5.

(47) Lan’s father is a doctor.He works in a hospital.He takes care of sick children.Her mother is a teacher.She teaches in a primary school.Lan has an elder brother.He is a journalist.He writes for a Hanoi newspaper.Lan is a student.She studies at a secondary school. Questions : 1What does Lan’s father do? 13……………………………………………………………………………… 2.Where does he work? 14…………………………………………………………………………….. 3.What does Lan’s mother do? 15…………………………………………………………………………….. 4.Where does she work? 16…………………………………………………………………………….. III/. WRITING Write exclamations using the words given. (1.5m) Example : nice/ cat  What a nice cat ! 1. beautiful / house ……………………………………………. 2. delicious / breakfast ……………………………………………. 3. interesting / books. ……………………………………………. B.Rearrange these words to make the correct senetences :(1,5 ms) 1. Is / there / book / a. 21. …………………………………………………………………………………………….. 2.His / is / name / What ? 22. …………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3.Am / taller / than / I / she. 23. …………………………………………………………………………………………….. V/. LISTEN KEY TO THE FIRST ENGLISH TEST. I/. LANGUGE FOCUS (3.0 m) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12. A A C A C C B C B A B A.

(48) II/. READING (2.0 m) 1 2 3 4. Lan’s father is a doctor. He works in a hospital. Her mother is a teacher. She teaches in a primary school.. III/. WRITING (3.0 m) A 1. What a beautiful house! 2. What a delicious breakfast! 3. What interesting books! B 1.There is a book. 2.What is his name? 3.I am taller than she. IV/. LISTENING (2.0 m) Tape transcription:. Week: 6 Period: 20. CORRECT THE TEST. I. Objectives: Help ss find the mistakes in their test and correcting the test. Skills: writing, reading very less listening and speaking. II. Language content Present simple tense, Future simple tense Ordinal numbers Prepositions Adjectives Occupations Is there a.....? / Are there any...? Question words * Vocabulary: Words relating to the topics “Back to school, Personal information,At home” III. Techniques: Asking and answering, give a speech, explanation. IV. Teaching aids: Aiding boarbs, pictures, cassette recorder and tape. V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and checking attendance: 2- Review of the previous lesson: No exam. 3- Correct the test Teacher’s and students’ activities. Content.

(49) T has ss give the answer Ss give the answer T corrects and explains T reads and writes the answer and explains Ss listen and copy down. T suggests how to write Ss follow to the teacher. T has ss listen to the passage Ss listen T gives the answer Ss copy down. I/. LANGUGE FOCUS (3.0 m) 1 A 2 A 3 C 4 A 5 C 6 C 7 B 8 C 9 B 10 A 11 B 12 A II/. READING (2.0 m) 1. Lan’s father is a doctor. 2. He works in a hospital. 3. Her mother is a teacher. 4. She teaches in a primary school. III/. WRITING (3.0 m) A. 1. What a beautiful house! 2. What a delicious breakfast! 3. What interesting books! B 1.There is a book. 2.What is his name? 3.I am taller than she. IV/. LISTENING (2.0 m). 4. Consolidation Ss introduce a person who they like best. 5. Homework: Prepare a 45-minute test *COMMENTS : ………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………… Week 7.

(50) Week: 8 Period: 21. UNIT 4. AT SCHOOL signature A. SCHEDULES (1,2,3). I. Objectives: Knowledge: Asking and answering about the time and one’s schedule. Skills:Developing reading and listening skill. Education: working has the time and schedule II. Language content * Grammar: Present simple tense, Wh- question (review) * Vocabulary: related to the topic “At school” III. Techniques Asking and answering, listening, reading and writing, work in pairs, work in individual. IV. Teaching aids: Aiding boarbs, pictures, cassette recorder and tape. V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and checking attendance: 2- Review of the previous lesson: Not exam. 3- New lesson: Teacher’s and students’ activities * Warm up : T asks Ss answer T introduces about the lesson. * Presentation: T shows each picture and asks ss to listen to the tape to know how to say the time. Ss listen to the tape. T notices special way to talk about the time. Ss copy down T turns on the cassette again and asks ss to repeat. Ss listen and repeat T asks some ss to read the sentences (below the pictures). Ss read the sentences. T asks one student: “What time is it?” (using one of the pictures) Student answers. * Controlled practice: T asks ss to ask and answer about the time (using the pictures) Ss practice in pairs.. Content + What time is it now? + What time do you go to school?  In this lesson we will learn how to ask and to answer the time. 1. Listen and repeat *Notes: - half=30 phút - a quarter=15 phút Nói giờ lẻ: - Giờ hơn: It’s + phút + past + giờ - Giờ kém: It’s + phút + to + giờ. Now practice saying the time with a partner T: What time is it? S: It’s seven o’clock..

(51) T corrects ss’ mistakes. Ss work in pairs A2 by asking and answering about oneself Ss change role ( to ask and answer continuously) Teacher changes the time in the pictures and asks ss to practice in pairs. * Asks 3 pairs to practice in pairs. T corrects ss’ mistakes * Futher practice: T has ss ask and answer the questions in pairs. Ss ask and answer T has ss ask and answer before the class Ss ask and answer and T corrects * Pre – listening: + Do you know what it is? + Do you know any names of subjects at school? * Subjects :; + math / music / history / physics / physical education.  Now you will listen and fill in the needed information in the schedule. * While – listening: T turns on the cassette once. Ss listen to the tape. T turns on the cassette again. Ss listen to the tape and complete the schedule. * Post-listening: T asks each st to fill the subject or the time as teacher turns the cassette and pauses after each blank. Ss give the answerand T corrects T asks - What do you have on Friday/ Saturday? Ss answer. 2. Answer about you Students’ answers. 3. Listen and write. Complete the schedule.. Answer: (Bold italic numbers and. words are the answers) Friday 7.00 7.50 8.40 9.40 10.30 Engli Geog Musi Physi Histo sh raphy c cs ry 1.00 Physical Educatio n. Saturday 2.40 3.40 Math. English. 4 - Consolidation: What time is it now? What time do your classes finish? 5. Homework: Pracice asking for and stating the time and talking about timetable.. 4.30 Physics.

(52) Week: 8 Period: 22. UNIT 4. AT SCHOOL A. SCHEDULES (4,5). I. Objectives: Knowledge:By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know how to ask and answer what someone is doing, using the present progressive tense. Skills Developing speaking, reading and listening skill. Education: working has the time and love the subjects II Language content : * Grammar: present progressive tense - What is/ are + S + doing ? - S + is/ are + V-ing * Vocabulary: Words relating to the topics “At school” III. Techniques Asking and answering, listening, reading and writing, work in pairs, work in individual. IV. Teaching aids: Aiding boarbs, pictures, cassette recorder and tape. V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and checking attendance: 2- Review of the previous lesson: Write: 10: 20, 4: 45, 3:15 Answer about you (3 sentences in A 2 ). 3- New lesson: Teacher’s and students’ activities * Warm up : T greets and calls some ss to write the names of subjects on the board and tell the class what they usually do and what time they usually do things everyday. Ss do as T asks. T introduces about the lesson. * Presentation: T asks ss to look at the pictures in the book and say the name of each subject in each picture . Ss look at the pictures and try to say T gives examples Ss listen and note down T helps ss review of present progressive tense Ss listen and note down * Controlled practice: T guides ss to work in pairs. Ss work in pairs . T calls some pairs to present before the class Ss raise the hand to do. Content. 4. Look at the picture. Ask and answer the questions. + What subject is it in each picture ? * Making dialogue : Ex : What is Lan doing She is studying Physics. What time does Lan have her Physics class? She has it at 8.40. Note : Present progressive tense Form : S + am/is/are + V-ing. Use : it is used to express an activity.

(53) T remarks and corrects the mistakes * Futher practice: T asks one what a student is doing and what time he/she has his/her English class. Ss answer * Pre – listening and reading T asks Ss answer T introduces the next part * While – listening and reading: T turns on the cassette. Ss listen to the tape then practice in pairs T has ss pairs play the roles. Ss play the roles. T corrects. T guides how to ask and answer questions about the schedule. Ss notice and copy down. T has ss write their schedule then ask and answer with a partner. Ss do as T asks. * Post-listening and reading: T has ss ask and answer before the class. Ss ask and answer. T corrects.. happening at the point of speaking at the present .. 5. Listen and read. + Do you have your daily and weekly schedule? + Do you uaually follow your schedule? * Now you will listen to the dialogue between Hoa and Thu who are talking about their schedules and the subjects they like. * Write your schedule in your execise book. Then aks and answer questions about your schedule with a partner.. - When do you have English? - What time do they start? - What other classes do you have on Thursday? - What’s your favorite subject?. 4. Consolidation Write the names of the subjects in Vietnames 1. Math 2. Biology 3. Physics 4. Chemistry 5. Vietnamese language & Literature 6. History 7. Geography 8. Civic Education 9. English 10. Physical Education 11. Fine Arts 12. Music 13. Technology Hoạt động thường gặp Class meeting : Họp lớp School assemble : Tập trung toàn trường : Elective subjects : Các môn tự chọn.

(54) 5. Homework Review os all knowledge in this period and prepare Unit 4. A 6. Week: 8 Period: 23. UNIT 4. AT SCHOOL A. SCHEDULES (6). I. Objectives: Knowledge:Ss will be able to know about schools in the USA. Skills: reading, very less listening, writing and speaking. Education: To love their clothes in school(school uniform) II. Language content * Grammar: present simple tense * Vocabulary: Words relating to the topics “Back to school, Personal information,At home” III. Techniques: Asking and answering, give a speech, explanation. IV. Teaching aids: Aiding boarbs, pictures, cassette recorder and tape. V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and checking attendance: 2- Review of the previous lesson: Answer: - What is Hung doing? - What time does Hung have his English? - What is Hoa doing? - What time does she have her Math? - What’s your favorite subject? - What do you have today? Write your schedule on Monday and Thursday.. 3- New lesson: Teacher’s and students’ activities * Warm – up: T asks. Ss answer. T introduces the lesson. * Pre – reading: T has ss listen to the passage Ss listen T elicits new words Ss listen then copy down T guides to read the words * While – reading:. Content - What time do your class start? - What time do they finish? - Do you have lunch at school? - What clothes do you have to wear to school? 6. Read. * New words: - be different from, translation - school uniform, give example - 20 minute break, translation - school cafeteria, explanation - snack (n) real object - popular (adv) , translation The answer:.

(55) T asks ss to read the passage and think to choose which statements are true and which ones are false Ss read the passage in silence and try to understand the content of the passage. T asks ss to compare the choice with the partner. Ss compare T calls ss to say their choice Ss raise the hand to do T corrects Ss copy the correct answers.. a) T b) F ( There are no lessons on Saturday) c) F ( one break in the morning, and the other is in the afternoon) d) T e) F ( The school cafeteria is open at lunch time and also at break) f) F ( Basket ball is one of the most popular after school activities). * Post – reading : T has ss discuss the differences between schools in Viet Nam and in the USA. Ss discuss the differences between schools in Viet Nam and in the USA. T remarks. Schools in Vietnam Schools in the USA - Classes start at 7 - Classes start at o’clock. 8.30. …. 4. Consolidation A student talk about his/ her school. 5. Homework: Read the lesson again, learn the words and prepare Unit 4.B 1,2 Week 8. signature. Week: 9 Period: 24. UNIT 4. AT SCHOOL B. THE LIBRARY (1,2). I. Objectives: Knowledge:- Ask for and give the position of things, asking and answering about positions of books, newspaper … in the library Skills:- Developing reading and listening skill. Education: Ss should go to the library andn read reference books II. Language content * Grammar: Prepositions of position. * Vocabulary: Words relating to kinds of books and library equipments III. Techniques.

(56) Asking and answering, listening, reading and writing, work in pairs, work in individual. IV. Teaching aids: Aiding boarbs, pictures, cassette recorder and tape. V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and checking attendance: 2- Review of the previous lesson: Read the passage: schools in the USA Answer true or false Talk about your school.. 3- New lesson: Teacher’s and students’ activities * Warm up : T asks Ss answer T introduces about the lesson. * Presentation: T asks some questions to lead the lesson Ss nanswer. Content - What is it? (a book) - Do you like reading books?. + What is it in the picture? + Where do you often see it? + Does you school have a library? + Is it useful? + What do you usually do when you go to T has ss listen then elicits new words the library? Ss listen and copy down. + Who often helps you find books at the T guides to read the words library? Ss listen and repeat  Now you will listen to the dialogue T has ss read again then corrects. between a librarian and Hoa. She is showing the positions of newspapers and T gives the notes of the use of prepositions magazines of position. 1. Listen and read. Ss takes notes in their notebooks: * New words: - rack (n) picture - shelf (n) , picture - dictionary (n) , real object - reader (n) , translation - novel (n) , real object - reference book , translation * Controlled practice: + On the left/ right T turns the cassette again and asks ss to read + At the back then answer the questions. + To open/ close at Ss read then answer the questions Answer: T has ss ask and answer. a. The magazines are on the racks (near the Ss ask and answer. science books) T corrects b. The newspapers are on the racks (near the history books). c. The math and science books are on the shelves on the left. d. The history and geography books, dictionaries and literature in Vietnamese are.

(57) on the shelves on the right. e. The books in English are at the back of the library. f. The library opens at 7 am. g. The library closes at 4. 30pm. 2. Listen. Then practice with a partner. Nga: Good morning. Librarian: Good morning: Can I help you? Nga: Yes. Where can I find the math books, please? Librarian: They’re on the shelves on the left. Nga: Do you have magazines and newspapers here? Librarian: Yes. They’re on the racks in the middle. Nga: Thank you very much. Librarian: You’re welcome. * Further – practice: T asks a pupil: “where is Minh’s seat?” Ss answer: He is at the back of the class. T says: you can ask the librarian where you can find some books to borrow in a library. T says: Last time, you knew where kinds of books are put in the library (B1). Now, let listen to the talk between Nga and the Librarian T turns the cassette on once. Ss listen T asks ss to work in pairs (the dialogue) Ss work in pairs. T asks some pairs of ss to act out the dialogue in front of the class then corrects. T guides to ask and to answer questions * Now ask and answer questions about the about the librarary plan in B1. library plan in B1 Ss practice. T corrects. 4 - Consolidation: - Ss name the books in the library. - Remember how to say about the positions of the books in the library. 5. Homework: Practice reading the dialogues, learn the words by heart and prepare Unit 4. B3, Week: 9 Period: 25. UNIT 4. AT SCHOOL B. THE LIBRARY (3,4). I. Objectives: Knowledge:- Talk about the position of things in a library. Skills- Developing reading and listening skill. Education: II Language content : * Grammar: - Revision of Prepositions of position * Vocabulary: Words relating to the topics “At school” III. Techniques Asking and answering, listening, reading and writing, work in pairs, work in individual. IV. Teaching aids: Aiding boarbs, pictures, cassette recorder and tape. V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and checking attendance:.

(58) 2- Review of the previous lesson: Ss read the dialogue (B1) and answer these questions: - Where are the magazines?- What books are on the left? - What books are on the right?- Where are the newspapers?. 3- New lesson: Teacher’s and students’ activities * Warm up : T asks. Ss answer. T introduces about the lesson. * Pre– listening: T reminds ss of the sections of different kinds of books in the library. T hangs picture on page 48 on the board. * While-listening: T turns the cassette on and to asks ss to label the shelves and racks for the first time. Ss listen to the tape and label the shelves and racks. T turns it again and pauses the tape after each label so that ss can do the task better. Ss complete their exercise. * Post-listening: T turns the cassette for the third time to correct the task by pausing the tape after each label and asking each st to give the answer. St gives the answer and T corrects. * Pre-reading: T asks ss to look at the pictures (p 49) and asks them if they knew the pictures. Or: Do you know the biggest library in the world? Ss answer T introduces new lesson. Ss listen. *While – reading: T asks ss to read the text silently. Then answer the questions below. Ss read the text silently. The answer the questions (pair-work). T calls some ss to ask and answer the questions in front of class. SS work in pairs. T corrects ss’ mistakes. Ss copy.. Content - Does our school have a library? - Name sone kinds of kooks in the library? 3. Listen Where are they?. Answer: 1. study area 2. Science+Math 3. Geography+History 4 -5. Newspapers and magazines 6-7. English 8. Librarian’s desk. 4. Read. Then answer - Which building is it in the picture? - Do you know which ios the largest library in the world ? - Where is it ? You will read about the largest library in the world. You read it and then you answer some questions in yor book. New words : - congress (n), translation - receive (v), axplanation - contain (v), give example - employee (n), explanation Answer key : a) It is in Washington D.C, the capitla of the USA. b) It has over 100 million books c) It has 1,000 km of shelves. d) Over 5,000 people work there.

(59) e) Because it receives copies of all American books.. * Post- reading : T asks. Ss answer. T remarks.. - Which is the largest library in Ha Noi ? ( The National Library ) - Where is it ? ( It is on Trang Tien Street ). 4. Consolidation - Ask ss some questions about the position of shelves and racks in the library. + Where are science books? à They are on the shaft on the left + Where are the magazines and newspaper? à They are on the rack in the middle of the library * Notes the use of prepositions of position. 5. Homework - Practice using correct prepositions of position in speaking and writing. Prepare Unit 5 – A1. Week: 9 Period: 26. UNIT 5. WORK AND PLAY A. IN CLASS (1). I. Objectives: Knowledge: - Ask and answer about subjects in school. Skills: - Developing reading and speaking skills. Education: To make the students aware of the importance of studying. II. Language content * Grammar: present simple tense What’s your favorite class? (Review) What do you study in …? * Vocabulary: Words relating to the topics “Work and play” III. Techniques: Asking and answering, reading, individual work, eliciting, work in pairs. IV. Teaching aids: Aiding boards, pictures, cassette recorder and tape. V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and checking attendance: 2- Review of the previous lesson: Read B4, answer 3 questions.. Write: reader (n), reference books, novel (n), dictionary (n)..

(60) 3- New lesson: Teacher’s and students’ activities * Warm – up:. T asks. Ss answer. T introduces the lesson * Presentation: T says: Now listen to the tape and give the information about Mai’s studying. Ss listen T plays the tape. Ss listen to the tape and read (books open) T asks ss to read the text silently and do task 1. - Students read silently again and do task 1 - T asks: “Do you learn how to use a computer?” Then uses a picture (in Mai’s computer Science class) and say “Mai learns how to use a computer” to illustrate the new word “learn how to use” * Other new words suggested by students (ex: Computer Science class; experiment, about …) * Practice: T asks ss to read the text again and answer the questions in pairs and to give 5 questions and answers about Mai. Ss work in pairs. T asks ss to read the questions and the answers about Mai in the text book. (page 52) Ss ask and answer. T corrects.. *Futher - practice:. Content. - How many days a week do you go to school? - What classes do you have today? - What time do you have English? - What do you study in English? 1. Listen and read * Notes: + Six days a week +We have…….. + At 7 o’clock + My favorite class is geography (English, Physics, …) Task 1 - learn how to use (sth): học cách sử dụng (cái gì) - computer science : tin học. - experiment [iks'perəmənt] : cuộc thí nghiệm - map: bản đồ - to be interested in : quan tâm đến ai/ cái gì Task 2: Now ask and answer five questions about “Mai” A: What does Mai study in her Geography class? B: She studies maps and learns about different countries. C: What is Mai’s favorite class? D: Her favorite class is Computer Science. Suggested answer a. What does Mai study in her Physics? à She does some experiments in physics. b. Which grade is she in? à She is in grade 7. c. What does she learn at school? à She learns about lots of different things (or learn how to use a computer) d. How many days a week does she go to school? à She goes to school six days a week. e. What does she study in Geography? à She studies maps and learn about different countries..

(61) T asks ss Now ask and answer questions about you Ss answer then ask and answer other subjects - What do you study in Geography? T remarks. 4. Consolidation - Teacher’s explanation of how to do: (explains new words)+ Event, poem, stories … - Students stick the correct names of subjects next to the flashcards on the board. Label the activities Learn how to speak , listen , read and write a foreign language Study how a computer works Learn maps and different countries Do some experiments Classes English Physics Geography Computer science. What to do. 5. Homework: - Write 5 sentences about Mai, do exercise A1 (workbook/ page 27), Prepare A2 (Unit 5 Week 9. signature. Week: 10 Period: 27. I. Objectives:. UNIT 5. WORK AND PLAY A. IN CLASS (2).

(62) Knowledge:. By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to describe one’s ability at school. Skills:- Developing reading and speaking skills. Education:Ss should have their favourite subject at school and their hobby in the free time II. Language content * Grammar: The present simple tense (review) Which subject + do/does + S + likes best? * Vocabulary: Words relating to kinds of books and library equipments III. Techniques Asking and answering, listening, reading comprehension, work in pairs, work in individual. IV. Teaching aids: Aiding boarbs, pictures, cassette recorder and smart pen. V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and checking attendance: 2- Review of the previous lesson: Ss read the text (A1-p51) and answer the questions: + What time do classes always begin? (at seven) + What is Mai interested in? (Computer Science class) + What does she study in her Geography class? (maps and learns about different countries). 3- New lesson: Teacher’s and students’ activities * Warm up : T greets and calls some ss to answer some questions about their studying at school Ss raise the hand to do .* Pre- reading : T asks ss to look at the two pictures (p 52) and says: Ss listen T asks ss to read the text and find out some information: Where Ba is; what his favorite subject is. Ss read the text and find out the information. T explains new words/ structures. Ss copy down * While – reading: T has ss listen to the passage. Ss listen. T has ss read in silently. Ss read in silently. T asks ss to read the questions below the text and answer them in groups of two. Ss works in pairs. T calls some pairs of ss to practice asking and answering the questions before class. Ss: pair-work. T corrects * Post – reading :. Content. 2. Read. Then answer the questions. This is Ba. Tell me what he is doing. (he’s learning how to repair a socket board in picture 1; and he’s playing the guitar in picture 2) - It is his favourite subject at school and his hobby in the free time . New words : -enjoy(v)= like - repair (v) =fix - household appliances: thiết bị trong nhà - draw(v)/ drawing(n): tranh vẽ - guitar(n) -art club(n) - artist(n) * Notes: - to be good at sth/doing sth - learn to play the guitar - to like....best - Which subject + do/ does + S + like best? * Answer key to the questions in the book. a) Ba likes Electronics best.

(63) Work in pair, ask and answer abut yourselves. b) Yes, he does. He enjoys school very much. c) He learns to repair household appliances d) He will be able to fix his own appliances e) Yes, he is . His drawings are very good.. 4 - Consolidation: T reminds ss of the structure: Which subject + do/does + S + likes best? 5-. Homework - Ss read part 3 – p 53, Prepare A4,5. 5. Homework: Practice reading the dialogues, learn the words by heart and prepare Unit 4. B 4,5. Week: 10 Period: 28. UNIT 5. WORK AND PLAY A. IN CLASS (4,5). I. Objectives: Knowledge: - Students know the names of other school subjects. Skills:. - Developing reading, listening and speaking skills. Education: To make Ss like the subjects at school because every subject is very importance and have educated II Language content : * Grammar: - Revision of Prepositions of position * Vocabulary: Words relating to the topics “ work and play” III. Techniques Asking and answering, listening, reading and writing, work in pairs, work in individual. IV. Teaching aids: Aiding boarbs, pictures, cassette recorder and smart pen. V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and checking attendance: 2- Review of the previous lesson: answer then write the answer: a. What do you study in Geography/ Electronics …? b. What are you good at? c. What is your favorite subject? d. What do you do in your free time?. 3- New lesson: Teacher’s and students’ activities * Warm up :. Content.

(64) T asks. Ss answer. T introduces about the lesson. * Pre– listening: T asks students to look at the pictures (at page 54 – textbook) + What are the pictures about? + Can you guess what subjects Ba and Hoa study on Saturday morning? T explains the task to students. Ss listen. * While– listening: T ask student to listen to the tape ( 1st time) Listening again (2nd time) T tells students to match the letters of the subjects with the appropriate students in correct orders. T has students cross check their answers with a partner. Listening again (3rd time) à T gives time for students to check the answers. T calls on some students to check the answers T remarks. * Post– listening: * Questions and answers (about Ba and Hoa) Ss practice in pairs T corrects Ss practice in pairs (about themselves).. - How many subjects do you study at school? - What do you study in Literature? 4. Listen. Then write the correct letters next to the names. Answer: - Ba: d, a, c - Hoa: c, b, e Ex: a. What classes does Ba study on Saturday morning? - He studies Technology, Geography and Class activities. b. What classes does Hoa study on Saturday morning? - She studies Computer Science, Physical education, and Class activities. Ex: a. What classes do you study on Saturday morning? T corrects. - I study … b. What classes do you study today? * Pre-reading: - I study … T elicits the topic and teaches new words 5. Read Task 1: * Notes: T says: Now skim the passage and pick out - event (n), translation the subjects mentioned in the passage. - essay (n), explanation Students read the text and do task 1 - period(n) Adding some subjects such as Music, Sports, - the same: Art … - instead T checks the answer with the whole class. - class activity(n) * While – reading: (Task) - as well: T says: Now read the passage again and find out what students study in these subjects (write on the board). Compare your answers in pairs. Ss write information into columns of Subjects. Students compare their answers in pair.

(65) * Post-reading: T has ss give the answer Ss give the answer Teacher gives corrects answers Ss copy down. T asksSs answwer. Answer: Literature – paintings History – basketball games Science – preposition English – England Which subject do you like best?. 4. Consolidation - What do you study in …? - What does he/ she learn in the Geography class? - She learns about … - He/she is good at … - What’s your favorite subject? 5. Homework - Do exercise A3 (workbook/ page 28, 29). Prepare Unit 5 B1. Week: 10 Period: 29. UNIT 5. WORK AND PLAY B. IT’S TIME AT RECESS (1). I. Objectives: Knowledge:-. - Talking about and describe recess activities. Skills:- Developing reading skills. Education: To make Ss choose the suitable activities at recess. II. Language content * Grammar: - The present simple tense (review) - Present progressive tense. (Review) * Vocabulary: Words relating to the topics “ work and play” III. Techniques: Asking and answering, reading, individual work, eliciting, work in pairs. IV. Teaching aids: Aiding boarbs, pictures, cassette recorder and smart pen. V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and checking attendance: 2- Review of the previous lesson: Ss read the text in part 5, page 54. Then answer the questions: - What do we learn in the Geography class? (different countries and their people) - What do we learn in the Physics class? (how things work) - What do we learn in the English class? (words, verbs, pronouns). 3- New lesson: Teacher’s and students’ activities * Warm – up:. Content.

(66) T asks. Ss answer. T introduces the lesson * Pre – reading: T asks and ss answer. T writes S’s suggested activities on the board. T Introduces recess activities and giving practice in reading. T teaches new words. + T has students look at the pictures. + T ask Ss questions such as: Task 1: Now skim the passage pick out the activities at recess. Students read the text and do task 1 (adding some activities such as: chatting, playing games …) T checks the answer with the whole class. T has Ss listen to the cassette while following the reading text. * While – reading: (Task 2) T says: Now read the passage again and adding more activities mentioned in the passage. Compare your answers in pairs. Ss write more games into columns of games. Ss compare their answers in pairs. * T gives correct answers. Task 3: T explains the task to Ss (review the present progressive tense) T has Ss read through the model T has Ss look at the picture. Elicit some activity in the picture in pairs. Ask and answer questions with a partner. Ask and answer questions with partner. T gives further practice in asking and answering questions about recess activities. * Further – practice: T has ss ask and answer Ss ask and answer. T corrects 4. Consolidation. - How many periods do you have today? 1. Listen and read + After the language class at 8:30 what is time for? + It’s time for recess. - Now, tell me what do you usually do at recess? + Ex: Talking, eating, drinking, and reviewing lessons … Where are the children? What are they doing? Do you like these games? * New words: - recess(n) giờ ra chơi - bell(n) picture chuông - chat (v), translation: tán gẩu - blind man’s bluff(n) picture - catch (n) , explanation - marbles (n) hòn bi - skip rope (v) Am.E; (B.E: skip)action - excited(a) hào hứng, phấn khởi - like(a) giống nhau, tương tự. Suggested answer: a) What is this boy doing? He’s playing catch. What are these buys doing? They are playing marbles. What are these boys doing? They are chatting. …. b) Students’ answers.

(67) Activities at recess Present progressive tense (review) 5. Homework Practice reading the lesson , learn the new words by heart and prepare Unit 5 B 2,3 Week 10. signature: 18/10/2012. Trần Quốc Hương. Week: 11 Period: 30. UNIT 5. WORK AND PLAY B. IT’S TIME AT RECESS (2,3)+ test 15’. I. Objectives: Knowledge: Ss will be able to know some names of activities at recess. Revise the present progressive Skills : listening, speaking, reading comprehension.and writing. Education: The students aware of the importance of relaxing at recess. II. Language content * Grammar: - present simple tense (review), Present progressive tense. (Review) * Vocabulary: Words relating to the topics “work and play” III. Techniques Asking and answering, listening, reading comprehension, work in pairs, work in individual. IV. Teaching aids:.

(68) Aiding boards, pictures, smart pen. V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and checking attendance: 2- Review of the previous lesson: Read the passage B 1 Answer: - What is this boy doing? - What are they doing? - What do you usually at recess? 3- New lesson: Teacher’s and students’ activities * Warm up : T has ss tell some activities at recess Ss answer * Pre- listening : T guides ss the task of listening. Ss listen. T asks ss to read the activities given well. Ss do as the request. * While - listening : T plays the pen twice Ss listen and compare the answer. T calls ss to give their answer. Ss raise the hand to do . T remarks and give correct answer. Ss copy down. * Post – listening : T asks. Ss answer * Pre-reading: T asks Ss answer T asks them some questions to lead into the content of the passage Ss listen and think to answer. * While - reading : T : ask ss to scan the passage to get the main inforamation in the pasage Ss: listen and read. T elicits some new words from the passage. Ss: listen and note down. T has ss read new words in chorus then asks them continue reading the passage and choose the correct answer. Ss read in silence and choose the correcct answer. T calls ss to give their answer before the. Content. 2. Listen. Match each name to an activity. * You will hear the tape about Mai, Kien, Lan, Ba. They are at the recess. Now you listen to the tape and decide which games each student plays by matching the names on the left column with the activities on the right one. * Answer key : Mai – is playing catch Kien is playing blindman’s bluff Lan is skipping rope Ba is playing marbles. - What does Mai do? … 3. Read . Then answer the questions. - What do Vietnamese students often do at recess? - Do you know what students in other countries / in the USA often do at recess? ( Ss can say in Vietnamese) à In oder to know exactly what American students often do at recess. Let’s read part 3 on the page 57. * New words : - Junior high school: -senior high school: - whole(a) toàn bộ, tất cả - portable CD player: máy CD có thể sách tay - mainly(adv) hầu như, chủ yếu - cards(n) thẻ - common(n) phổ biến.

(69) class. Ss raise the hand to do. * Post - reading : T corrects. T asks ss to work in group to make a list of activities that American and Vietnamese students do at the recess. - relax(v) thư giản - mostly(adv) phần lớn - worldwide(n) khắp thế giới - pen pal (n) bạn qua thư tín - earphone (n) tay nghe - energetic (a)sung sức, hiếu động - take part in (v) tham gia - score a goal (v) ghi tỉ số bàn thắng - to swap baseball cards with (v) trao đổi thẻ bóng chày với... * The answer: a) D b) A c) D d) D ( Make a list of activities that American and Vietnamese students often do ). 4 - Consolidation: T asks ss to write a passage about their activities at a recess. 5-. Homework - Ss practice eading B 3 , lean the words by heart and prapare Unit 6 A 1 THE SECOND 15- MINUTE TEST I/. Complete the sentences (7ms) 1. We……………….….. how to use a computer in the Computer Science class. 2. In the ………………….. class we study maps and learn about different countries. 3. In……………, we study past and present events in Viet Nam and around the world. 4. In the language class, we study …………………….. 5. In literature, we study authors and …………book. 6. In ……………………...., we study about how things work and do experiments. 7. In ………………….….., we study plants and animals. II/. Choose the best option. (3ms) 1. What is Lan ……………. now? She is studying Physics. A. study B. studying C. studies D. studys 2. ……………time does Mai have her English class? – At 1.50. A. What B. Why C. Which D. How 3. Ba is good ………….. fixing things. A. on B. about C. at D. with 4. Her favorite class is Geography.. She ………………….Geography best. A. likes B. plays C. studies D. learns 5. ………..others do you have today? A. why B. how C. where D. what 6. He ……………….. math at the moment A. is studying B. studying C. are studying D. studies. Answer key:.

(70) I/. 7ms 1.0 mark for each right answer 1. learn 2. Geography 5. writing 6. Physics II/. 3ms 0.5 mark for each right answer 1. B 2. A. 3. C. 4. A. Week: 11 Period: 31. 5. D. 3. history 4. English 7. Biology. 6. A. UNIT 6. AFTER SCHOOL A. WHAT DO YOU DO? (1). I. Objectives: Knowledge:Ss will be able to say about the activities after school. Skills : listening, speaking, reading comprehension.and writing. Education: The students aware of the importance of relaxing after school. II Language content : * Grammar: - The present simple tense: Describe habits or daily activities - The present progressive: Describe activities in progress at the moment of speaking Make suggestions or invitations: - Let’s … - Why don’t you …? * Vocabulary: Words relating to the topics “ After school” III. Techniques Asking and answering, listening, reading and writing, work in pairs. IV. Teaching aids: Aiding boarbs, pictures, smart pen. V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and checking attendance: 2- Review of the previous lesson: Ss read the text (B3-page 57) Ss answer the questions: What do the energetic students do at recess?(They often play basketball) Who swap baseball cards? ( Some of the children, mainly boys do) What activities are the same all over the world? ( Eating and talking). 3- New lesson: Teacher’s and students’ activities Content * Warm up : T asks. Ss answer. * Now tell me what you usually do - T writes Ss’ suggested activities on the when you don’t go to school board. Ex: T introduces about the lesson. + go swimming.

(71) * Presentation : T says: We will listen to the dialogue between Minh and Hoa. They are talking about Ba and their activities after school. Check (v) the activities above if Hoa, Minh and Ba also do them. Ss check the list of activities while listening and reading the dialogue. T asks Ss if there are difficult or new words, then explain them if there are any. * Practice: T has ss listen to the dialogues then work in pairs. Ss listen and read after the smart pen. T has ss ask and answer Ss ask and answer T corrects * Further- Practice: T asks ss to wor in pair freely to talk about their ativities after school. Ss work in pait freely T has ss ask and answer Ss ask and answer. + Play sports + Study at home + Play games + Watch TV + Listen to music 1. Listen. Then practice with a partner. * New words: - together(adv) cùng nhau, với nhau - come along(v) đến - maybe(adv) có thể - cafeteria (n) , translation + Let’s +V… + Why don’t you +V…? + What should we do? Answer: a. She’s doing her math homework. b. They are going to get a cold drink in the cafeteria. c. He’s in the music room. d. He’s learning to play the guitar. e. He usually meets his friends. f. She likes playing volleyball.. 4. Consolidation Students make suggestions or invitations, using Let’s +V…/Why don’t you +V…?/ What should we do? 5. Homework - Do exercise A1 – p 33, Prepare A2 Week: 11 Period: 32. UNIT 6. AFTER SCHOOL A. WHAT DO YOU DO? (2). I. Objectives: Knowledge:Ss will be able to say about the activities after school, using frequent adverbs. Skills : listening, speaking, reading comprehension.and writing. Education: The students aware of the importance of relaxing after school (habits/ daily activities). .II. Language content * Grammar: Present simple tense, frequent adverbs * Vocabulary: words relating to after school activities. III. Techniques: Asking and answering, individual work, eliciting, work in pairs. IV. Teaching aids: Aiding boarbs, pictures, smart pen..

(72) V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and checking attendance: 2- Review of the previous lesson: Ss practice the conversation between Minh and Hoa (page 60) Ss answer some questions: - What is Hoa doing? She’s doing her math homework. - What are Minh and Hoa going to do? They are going to get a cold drink in the cafeteria. - What is Ba doing? He’s learning to play the guitar. - What does Minh usually do after school? He usually meets his friends.. 3- New lesson: Teacher’s and students’ activities * Warm – up: T asks. Ss answer. T introduces the lesson * Presentation: T asks ss to look at the pictures and name them. Ss look at the pictures and name them. T checks ss’ answers. T asks ss to list some more afterschool activities. Ss list some more after-school activities. T asks ss: What do you usually do after school? Ss answer. T asks ss to tell the activities for each day of the week. Ss: individual work. T notices ss the use of the adverbs of frequency. T calls some pairs of ss perform in front of the class. Ss work in pairs. * Free – practice: T asks: “How often do you study in the library after school? Ss answer. T has ss practice in pairs. (Ss can use the activities in exercise 2 – page 61 in their speaking) Ss practice in pairs. T corrects ss’ mistakes. 4. Consolidation. Content What do you do after school? Which sports do you like playing? 2. Practice with a partner. - swimming pool(n) hồ bơi a. Look at these activities. Label the pictures.. Answer: 1. Reading/ Studying in the library. 2. Swimming in the pool. 3. Playing computer games. 4. Going to a movie. 5. Playing soccer. 6. Watching TV.. b. Ask and answer. Students’ answers. Now ask and answer questions using “How often…?”.

(73) * Look at the dialogue (A1) again and explain why Minh use different verb tense forms: + Ba is learning to play the guitar. He practices every day after school à The present simple: habits/ daily activities. à The present progressive: activities in progress. * What do you say to suggest doing something? à Let’s/ Why don’t you + bare inf. 5. Homework - Learn vocabulary by heart.- Write sentences about your activities after school for each day of week. Use adverbs of frequency.- Do exercise A2-p 33- Prepare A3,4,5. Signature : 26/10/2012. Trần Quốc Hương. Week: 12 Period: 33. UNIT 6. AFTER SCHOOL A. WHAT DO YOU DO? (3,4). I. Objectives: Knowledge: - At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to go on saying about outdoor activities. Skills : Listening and reading comprehension Education: Ss should take part in outdoor activities II. Language content * Grammar: - The present simple tense: Describe habits or daily activities - Adverbs of frequency and question with “How often …?” - The present progressive tense: Describe activities in progress at the moment of speaking. - Let’s …: to make suggestions or invitations - Adverbs of frequency and question with “How often …?” * Vocabulary: Words relating to daily activities III. Techniques Asking and answering, listening, reading comprehension, work in pairs, work in individual. IV. Teaching aids: Aiding boarbs, pictures, smart pen. V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and checking attendance: 2- Review of the previous lesson: Answer: - What does Minh usually after school? - Which sports does Hos like playing?.

(74) - What do you usually do after school? - How often do you study in the library after school? Look at the pictures then write: swimming, reading, watch TV. 3- New lesson: Teacher’s and students’ activities * Warm up : T shows some pictures of artwork and asks ss to guess the activities pictured. * Pre – reading: T says: Now scan the text, then remark the Ss of class 7A do activities like you do or not. Ss read the text and find out activities that the Ss of class 7A do. T teaches the new words. Content - What do you like doing after school? - Do you like collecting stamps?. 3. Read. Then answer * New words: + act- acting(v) + rehearse a play(v) diễn tập kịch + school anniversary celebration: ngày lễ kỉ niệm của trường + Stamp collector’s club: câu lạc bộ sưu * While – reading: tầm tem Ss read the text again and answer the + comic (n) truyện tranh questions in pairs + orchestra (n) dàn nhạc giao hưởng Ss compare their answers in pairs. + president(n) nhóm trưởng, chủ tịch T calls on some Ss to give their answers in front of the class Answer: T gives correct answers. a. Her group is rehearsing a play for the T checks Ss’ comprehension by asking them school anniversary celebration. some questions b. He gets American stamps from Liz, his American friend. c. The stamp collector’s club meets on Wednesday afternoon. * Post – reading: d. Nam never plays games T says: You are going to hear some Ss + What does Nga like doing after school? describing their school activities. + What do Ba and his friends often do on Wednesday afternoon? ( They get together and task about their stamps) + What does Nam often do after school? * Pre – listening: ( He often reads a library book or comics…) T explains how to do. 4. Listen. Match each name to an activity. Ss listen * Notes: T asks Ss of there are difficult or new words, +circus (using picture) and explains them if there are any. + Tidy the room (giving example) Ss listen and take notes * Pre – listening: T plays the smart pen and asks ss to listen. Ss listen and read after the smart pen T asks them to read the information in two columns T plays the pen again and asks Ss to match each name to an activity. Answer: * Post – listening: Mai go to the circus.

(75) T calls on some Ss to give result. Ss give result. T corrects. Ss copy down. Nam Ba Lan Kien. go to the school cafeteria watch a movie tidy the room rehearse a play. 4 - Consolidation: - Review the present simple tense - To make suggestions: Let’s + bare infinitive - To asks Ss to find out the words of sports and fun. (Look at the picture on page 63) 5. Homework - Learn vocabulary by heart,write some simple sentences about your activities after school , prepare Unit 6. B. 1. Week: 12 Period: 34. UNIT 6. AFTER SCHOOL B. LET’S GO! (1). I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to go on learning some suggestion sentences, give an invitation and how to respond. 2. Skill: Reading, listening, speaking and less writing. 3. Education: Ss will be educated the activities after school. II. Language content: 1. Vocabulary: Related to the topic “After school” 2. Grammar: What about + V-ing ……? Let’s + V… Why don’t you + V…? Are you going to + V …? Modal: Should III. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. - Techniques: Asking and answering, eliciting, playing the roles, pairwork. IV. Teaching aids: Text book, lesson plan, picture, aiding board, smart pen. V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and checking attendance: 2- Review of the previous lesson: Read A3., write a list of activities after school, answer the questions. + What does Nam often do after school? ( He often reads a library book or comics…) + What do you often do after school?. 3- New lesson: Teacher’s and students’ activities * Warm up :. Content Now tell me “what do you usually do after.

(76) T leads into the lesson.. Ss listen. T uses the picture to introduce the situation of the dialogue. * Presentation : - T says: We will listen to a dialogue (Hoa, Ba, Lan, Nam). They are talking about their activities after school. Now listen and guess the activities in the dialogue by answering some questions: - What does Nam suggest? - How does Lan answer? - Does Hoa accept Lan’s offer? T explains the newwords, structures for making, accepting and refusing invitations.. * Controlled – practice: T plays the tape. Ss listen and read after the tape. Ss practice the dialogue in groups of 4 and answering the questions on page 64. T corrects.. * Further – practice: - T gives further questions. * In the dialogue, Nam suggests everyone to go to the movies. What expression does he use?. school?” In the last lesson you learned about afterschool activities. And now we continue listening to and talking about these activites. 1. Listen. Then practice in groups of four - come on(v) tiếp tục - it’ll be fun: nó sẽ vui - there aren’t any good movies on at the moment: ngay bây giờ không có phim hay nào cả.. - assignment (n) * Structures: (review) - What about going to the movies? I’m sorry. I can’t come. - Let’s go to my house. Ok. I’ll. Why don’t you relax? Great. Are you going to come? Good idea! What should we do this evening? Answer; a. Nam wants to go to the movies. b. Lan doesn’t want to go to the movies because there aren’t any good movies on at the moment. c. Lan wants to listen to some music at her house. d. Hoa doesn’t want to go to Lan’s house because she has too many assignments. e. It’s Saturday. (- What about + V-ing …?) * Hoa refuses Lan’s invitation. How does she say? (- I’m sorry. I can’t …) - Ss answer.. 4. Consolidation * Look at the dialogue again and draw the forms from Nam’s suggestion..

(77) What about + V-ing Let’s + bare – inf * Follow-up: Groups of 4 Ss make similar dialogue, using Ss’ real activities. Ex: - A: What should we do this weekend? - B: What about going fishing? - C: Great! How about you. D? - D: I’m sorry. I can’t go. I have to look after my sick sister. 5. Homework - Learn vocabulary and structures by heart, make new dialogue as B1,do exercises B1,2 (notebook / p.54,55), prepare B2. Week: 12 Period: 35. ----------------------------UNIT 6. AFTER SCHOOL B. LET’S GO! (2). I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand some popular activities in the USA through a survey. 2. Skill: Reading, speaking and writing skill. 3. Education: Ss will be educated the activities after school. II. Language content: 1. Vocabulary: Related to the topic “After school” 2. Grammar: Present simple tense (review) III. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. - Techniques: Asking and answering, individual work, eliciting, playing the roles, work in pairs. IV. Teaching aids: Text book, lesson plan, picture, aiding board. V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and checking attendance: 2- Review of the previous lesson: Ss go to the board and practice dialogue 1. Ss answer these questions: What does Nam want to do? (go to the movie) Why doesn’t Lan want to go to the movie? (there aren’t any good movies on at the moment) What does Lan want to do? (listen to music at her house). 3- New lesson: Teacher’s and students’ activities * Warm – up: T asks ss to name some activities and organizations for teenagers they know. Ss name some activities and organizations for teenagers they know.. Content Can you name some activities and organizations for teenagers that you know? Ex: - Guide: - Go shopping:.

(78) * Pre-reading: T introduces: In America, Ss aged between 13 and 19 are called “teenager”. Now guess the activities that American teenagers like to do in their free time. Ss read the text and find out the activities that American teenagers do (attend youth organization such as “scouts and guides”) T explains new words: T says: “guide” means member of organization for boys which aims to develop character and promotes outdoor activities.. * While-reading: T has ss read the text in individual. Ss read the text in individual. T has ss read the text again. Ss read the text again. T corrects. T asks: Are there many kinds of entertainment for teenagers in Vietnamese? - What are they? - Which of activities in the list for American teenagers do you think are also popular among Vietnamese teenagers? (Watch TV, listen to music, go to movies, help old people) - What organizations are there for teenagers in Vietnam? (There are organizations such as Young Pioneers or different kinds of clubs for children) T gives practice in talking about leisure /’le~/ activities.. - Watch TV: - Listen to music: - Go camping: - Play sports: - youth organization (n) 2. Read and discuss. - Scout: also boy scout ( Hướng đạo sinh nam): hội viên của tổ chức hướng đạo nam( the Scouts or the Boy scouts of America). Tổ chức này nhằm rèn luyện cho hội viên những kỹ năng thực tiễn và xây dựng nhân cách. - guide also girl guide (BE)/girl scout (AmE): hội viên của tổ chức hướng đạo nữ (the girl guide association). Tổ chức này nhằm rèn luyện cho hội viên những kỹ năng thực tiễn và xây dựng nhân cách. - musical instrument: dụng cụ âm nhạc - coin (n) đồng tiền - youth organization (n) - survey (n) - top ten (n) - fast food (n) - attend (v) - make model (v).

(79) T lets Ss work in groups of 4. Ss work in group. T has ss rea their result . Ss read. * Post - reading: T asks ss to make a list of top ten/ top five most favorite leisure activities. Ss work in groups of two. * One or two representatives of the groups report their list to the class.. Suggested answer: + Play soccer + Play table tennis + Collect stamps or coins + Go shopping + Learn to play a musical instrument …. 4. Consolidation T asks Ss to talk about their ideas from the question “How do Vietnamese teenagers help old people?” 5. Homework - Learn vocabulary by heart. - Write sentences about your activities after school for each day of week. Use adverbs of frequency; Do exercises B3,4 – p. 56,57 ; Prepare Unit 6. B 3.. Date: 02/11/20112 Từ ngày 12/11/2012 đến ngày 17/11/2012 Signature: Week: 13 Period: 36 UNIT 6. AFTER SCHOOL B. LET’S GO! (3) Trần Quốc Hương I. Objectives: Knowledge: - Talking about after school activities, make invitations, accept or refuse invitations. Skills: reading, very less listening, writing and speaking. Education: Ss how to make invitations, accept or refuse invitations. II. Language content * Grammar: - Present simple tense (review) - Modals. - Would you like to …? - New expression: I’d love to, but … Sorry, I can’t. * Vocabulary: Words relating to daily activities III. Techniques Asking and answering, listening, playing the roles, work in pairs, eliciting. IV. Teaching aids: Aiding boarbs, pictures, smart pen. V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and checking attendance: 2- Review of the previous lesson: - Tell the top ten most ppopular activities of American teenagers. - write five activities that you like doing in your free time..

(80) 3- New lesson: Teacher’s and students’ activities * Warm up : T asks Ss answer T writes Ss’ answers on the board Ex: - Have a party Go out for dinner Go to the cinema T says: We are going to listen to a dialogue between Nga, Lan, and Hoa. Nga invites Lan and Hoa to come to her house for lunch. How does she say? Ss listen * Presentation: T plays the smart pen once. Ss listen. T asks Ss of there are difficult structures or new words, and explains them. - In the dialogue. Nga invites Lan, Hoa to come to her; house for lunch. What expression does she use? - Ss answer. - T says: Lan accepts, what expression does she use? - Ss answer. - T says: Hoa refuses, what expression does she use? - Ss answer. Ss take notes. T asks Ss to listen and read after the smart pen. Ss to listen and read after the smart pen. *Practice controlled: * Pair work (practicing the dialogue in pairs, alternating roles) Ss work in pairs T corrects ss’ pronunciation and gives further questions * Pair work (making similar dialogue) T demonstrates the dialogue with the one student. Ss work in pairs T corrects * Further – practice: Some pairs of ss perform in front of the class. T corrects ss’ mistakes.. Content - Now tell me what you usually do on your birthday. 3. Listen. Then practice with a partner. Make similar dialogues. * Notes: - wedding (n) - Would you like to come to my house for lunch? Yes, I’d love to. - I’m not sure. I’ll call you tomorrow. - I’d love to, but I can’t come. - Thanks for inviting me. It’s my pleasure. - Thanks anyway You’re welcome -I’d love to, but… - I’m sorry, I can’t. + Would you like to …?. + Yes, I love to. + I’d love to. But …… + Sorry, I can’t.

(81) + Would you like to go to the zoo with me at this weekend? + Students accept/ refuse. 4 - Consolidation: - T reminds ss of the structures: - What do you say to invite someone to do something (e.g. go to the party?) + Would you like to go to the party with me? - Students accept/ refuse + Would you like to + bare infinitive - I’d love to + I’d love to, but … - I’m sorry, I can’t 5. Homework - Learn vocabulary by heart - Make a similar dialogue about making arrangement and making accepting/ refusing invitations - prepare Language focus 2 EXPERIMENTS: ........................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................... Từ ngày 12/11/2012 đến ngày 17/11/2012 Week: 13 Period: 37 LANGUGE FOCUS 2 I. Objectives: Knowledge: Remind students of the language knowledge from Unit 4 to Unit 6. Skills: reading, very less listening, writing and speaking. Education: Not available.

(82) II Language content: * Grammar: - Present progressive tense. - This/That, These/Those - Time - Vocabulary: subjects - Adverbs of frequency. - Let’s + V (bare infinitive) Should we …? Would you like to + V (bare infinitive) …? * Vocabulary: Words relating to the topics “At school, after school, Work and play” III. Techniques Asking and answering, eliciting, playing the roles, work in pairs. IV. Teaching aids: Aiding boarbs, pictures. V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and checking attendance: 2- Review of the previous lesson: No checking. 3- New lesson: Teacher’s and students’ activities T asks ss about the picture. Ss answer. T reminds ss of the present simple tense. Ss listen T asks ss to complete the passage. Ss complete the passage in groups of two. T corrects. Content 1. Present progressive tense.. Answer: is doing/ is writing/ is reading/ is cooking/ are playing/ is kicking/ is running 2. This/That, These/Those. T introduces the situation Ss listen T asks ss to complete the dialogue. Ss complete the passage in groups of two. T calls some pairs of ss to perform the dialogue before the class. Ss work in pairs. T corrects.. Answer: a. Sorry, Mom b. this/ That/ This c. those/ These/ those d. those/ these 3. Time. T asks ss to complete the dialogues by writing the correct time. Ss complete the dialogues in pairs. T calls some pairs of ss to perform the dialogues in pairs. Ss work in pairs.. Answer: b. a quarter past seven/ seven fifteen C. half past ten/ ten thirty. d. six forty-five/ a quarter to seven.

(83) T corrects. 4. Vocabulary: subjects T asks ss to name the subjects they’ve learnt. Ss: individual work. T asks ss to write the correct subject names Ss write the correct subject names T asks ss to check the answers. Ss give the answers. T corrects. Answer: a. Physical Education b. Chemistry c. Math d. Geography e. English f. History 5. Adverbs of frequency.. T reminds ss of the adverbs of frequency Ss listen T asks ss to write sentences about Ba. Ss write sentences about Ba. T asks some ss to write the answers on the board. Ss write the answers on the board. T corrects.. T reminds ss of the structures: Let’s + V(bare infinitive) Should we …? Would you like to + V(bare infinitive) …? T explains the table and asks ss to perform the examples. Answer: Ba never goes to the cafeteria at lunchtime. Ba always practices the guitar after school. Ba usually does her homework in the evening. Ba sometimes plays computer games. 6. Making suggestions - Let’s + V(bare infinitive) Should we …? Would you like to + V (bare infinitive) …? Lan: Let’s go swimming. Hoa: OK. Minh: Should we play table tennis? Nam: I’m sorry, I can’t. Ba: Would you like to play basketball? Nga: I’d love to. Suggestions: A: Let’s play volleyball. B: OK.. T asks ss to write down possible dialogues. C: Would you like to watch movies? Ss write down possible dialogues. D: I’d love to..

(84) T calls some pairs of ss to perform E: Should we play soccer? the dialogues before the class. F: I’m sorry, I can’t. Ss work in pairs. T corrects. G: Would you like to come to my house? H: I’m sorry, I can’t. 4. Consolidation Answer: - What time is it? - Which classes do you have today? - What are you doing? 5. Homework - Learn vocabulary by heart,write your activities for relating after school; Prepare B2. EXPERIMENTS: ........................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................... Từ ngày 12/11/2012 đến ngày 17/11/2012 Week: 13 Period: 37* REVISION I. Objectives: Knowledge: Remind students of the language knowledge from Unit 4 to Unit 6. Skills: reading, very less listening, writing and speaking. Education: Not available II Language content : * Grammar: - Present progressive tense. - This/That, These/Those - Time - Vocabulary: subjects - Adverbs of frequency. - Let’s + V(bare infinitive) Should we …? Would you like to + V(bare infinitive) …? * Vocabulary: Words relating to the topics “ At school, After school, Work and play” III. Techniques Asking and answering, eliciting,playing the roles, work in pairs. IV. Teaching aids: Aiding boarbs, pictures. V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and checking attendance: 2- Review of the previous lesson: No checking. 3- New lesson: Teacher’s and students’ activities. Content.

(85) * Warm up: T has ss play a game called “chain game” Ss play the game (class divided into two groups, say activities after school. T follows and remarks * Practice: T write exercise I and has ss do it Ss copy down and work in individual. Start with: I often listen to music,…. I/. Choose the best option 1. How …………. does she write to you? (always, often, usually, never) 2. Let’s ………….. him to the party T has ss compare the answer with a tonight? partner. (invite, to invite, inviting, invites) Ss compare the answer in pairs 3.Their brother ………visit the USA next week. (will going to, goes to , is going to)? 4. What about …………..something T has ss give the answer. to eat? Ss give the answer (we have, having, have) 5. She’ll ………….. at home in an T corrects if necessary hour. Ss copy down. (go, goes, going) 6. Thank you ………..inviting me to your party? (to, about, for) 7. Tuan and Minh enjoy………..badminton on Sunday. (play, plays, to play, playing) The answer: 1. often 2. invite 3. is T write exercise II and has ss do it going to Ss copy down and work in individual 4. having 5. going 6. for 7. playing T has ss compare the answer with a II. Rewrite the sentences: partner. 1. go / with / my / never / friends / Ss compare the answer in pairs I / at night / out. 2. she / shopping / go / usually / T has ss give the answer. doesn’t. Ss give the answer 3. at / on / 8.40 / Tuesday / has / Thu / Physics T corrects if necessary 4. to / Would / play / you / like / Ss copy down. basketball? 5. after school / I / the / in / library / always / study. T asks ss to write the answer Suggessted answer: Ss work in individual 1. I never go out with my friends at T has ss ask and answer night. Ss ask and answer 2. She doesn’t usually go shopping. T corrects 3. Thu has Physics at 8.40 on.

(86) Tuesday. 4. Would you like to play basketball? 5. I always study in the library after school. III/. Write the answer 1. What’s your favorite subject? 2. What do you do after school? 3. When do you have history? 4. What do you usually in the afternoon? 5. What sports do you like playing? The answer: Students’ answer 4. Consolidation Write activitites after school 5. Homework Prapare for a test. EXPERIMENTS: ........................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................ Signature: 9/11/2012. Week 13. Trần Quốc Hương.

(87) Từ ngày 19/11/2012 đến ngày 24/11/2012 Week: 14 Period: 38 THE SECOND FORTY-FIVE ENGLISH TEST I. Objectives: Knowledge: Checking students’ knowledge from Unit 4 to Unit 6. Skills: reading, listening, writing Education: Not available II Language content : * Grammar: - Present progressive tense. - This/That, These/Those - Time - Vocabulary: subjects - Adverbs of frequency. - Let’s + V(bare infinitive) Should we …? Would you like to + V(bare infinitive) …? * Vocabulary: Words relating to the topics “ At school, After school, Work and play” II. Matrix Nội dung. I. Listening. II. Language. Listen to the passage about Minh and fill in the missing words in the gaps.. Nhận biết TN TL. Thông hiểu Vận dụng TN TL TN TL. Tổng số:. 5. 5. 2.5. 2.5=25% 8. 8.

(88) focus III. Reading. IV. Writing. Choose the best . option A, B C or D Read the passage about Hoa then write true or false for these sentences, Answer the questions. Use the words or phrases to. 2.0. 2.0=20%. 4. 4. 1.0. 2.0. wrire into the complete sentences 4 Tổng số: III. Questions. 1.0. 8. 3.0=30%. 5. 5 2.5=25% 26 10.00 =100%. 5. 8. 2.5 9. 2.5. 2.0. 4.5. THE 2nd FORTY-FIVE- MINUTE TEST I/. LISTENING (2.5m) Listen. Then complete the following dialogue. Nga: Mai, Should we go to the ……(1)…………cafeteria? Mai: OK. That’s a great idea. Nga: What about you? Nam: Sorry. I have to rehearse for a ……(2)……… with the drama group. Nga: Ba, do you want to ………(3)……… us? Ba: Oh, no. I am going to the circus tonight with my family. Sorry. Nga: How about you, Kien? Kien: I would love to, but I am going to tidy the ……(4)……… for Miss Lien this evening. Nga: Ok. Would you like to come with us to the cafeteria, Lan? Lan: Sorry. I’m giong to the………(5)…….. theater. Have a good time. Answer: 1…………..2……………..3…………….4……………5……………. II/. LANGUAGE FOCUS (3.0m) Circle the best option A, B, C or D 1.What are you ------? a.do 2.I enjoy-----volleyball. a.to play 3.Let’s--- computer games. a.play 4.What should we----this evening? a.doing 5.Would you like-----? a.come 6.What about-----to the movies? a.to go. b.does b.play b.to play b.to do b.to come b.going. c.doing c.playing c.playing c.do c.coming c.go. d.to do d.played d.played d.did d.came d.went.

(89) 7.Her group---rehearing a play. a.is b.am c.are d.were 8.What is your-----subject? a.liking b.loving c.lovely d.favorite 9.Can I----you? a.to help b.help c.helping d.helped 10.They are on the racks---the middle. a.at b.in c.on d.with 11.---can I find the math books,please? a.What b.Where c.When d.How 12.How---books does it have? a.much b.few c.many d.a few III/. READING (2.0m) Read the passage carefully: At twenty-five past nine, the bell rings and all the students go into the yard. It’s time for recess. They are all happy and excited.They meet their friends and have some fun. Many are talking about the last lesson. Some are eating and drinking as well as chatting. Some students are playing games like blindman’s bluff or catching. Some boys are playing marbles and some girls are skipping rope. But the most popular activity is talking.The yard is very noisy until the bell rings.Then everyone goes indoors and classes begin again. Questions : 1. What time does the bell rings ? -------------------------------------------------------------2. Are they happy and excited when the bell rings? -------------------------------------------------------------3. What is the most popuplar activity? -------------------------------------------------------------4. Is the yard noisy until the bell rings ? . -------------------------------------------------------------IV/. WRITING (2.5 m) A. Put the adverbs in brackets into the right places 1.They watch television in the evening.(usually) ………………………………………………………… 2.This boy plays soccer every afternoon.(often) ……………………………………………………….. 3. I am late for school.(never) …………………………………………………… B. Making suggestions following the words EX: read a book. What about reading a book? Let’s read a book. Why don’t you read a book? 1. Listen to music. ………………………………………….. 2. Come to my house. ………………………………………. KEY TO THE SECOND ENGLISH TEST I/. LANGUGE FOCUS (3.0 m) Choose the right word or phrase that best completes the sentence * .0,25 mark for each right answer 1 2. C C.

(90) 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12. A C B B A D B B B C. II/. READING (2.0M) * .0,5 mark for each right answer 1. The bell rings at twenty-five past nine. 2. Yes, they are. 3. The most popular activity is talking. 4. Yes,it is. III/. WRITING (2.5 m) * .0,5 mark for each right answer IV/. LISTENING (2.5 m)Listen. Then complete the following passage. * .0,5 mark for each right answer EXPERIMENTS: ........................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................... Từ ngày 19/11/2012 đến ngày 24/11/2012 Week: 14 Period: 39 CORRECT THE SECOND FORTY- FIVE ENGLISH TEST I. Objectives: Knowledge: Help ss find the mistakes in their test and correct them. Skills: reading, listening, writing Education: Not available II. Language content * Grammar: - Present progressive tense. - This/That, These/Those - Time - Vocabulary: subjects - Adverbs of frequency. - Let’s + V(bare infinitive) Should we …? Would you like to + V(bare infinitive) …? * Vocabulary: Words relating to the topics “ At school, After school, Work and play”.

(91) III. Techniques: Asking and answering, give a speech, explanation. IV. Teaching aids: Cassette recorder and tape. V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and checking attendance: 2- Review of the previous lesson: No checking. 3- correct the test Teacher’s and students’ activities Content T has ss give the answer I/. LISTENING (2.5 m) Ss give the answer Listen. Then complete the following T corrects and explains dialogue. T reads and writes the answer and Nga: Mai, Should we go to the school explains cafeteria? Ss listen and copy down Mai: OK. That’s a great idea. Nga: What about you? Nam: Sorry. I have to rehearse for a play with the drama group. Nga: Ba, do you want to join us? Ba: Oh, no. I am going to the circus tonight with my family. Sorry. Nga: How about you, Kien? Kien: I would love to, but I am going to tidy the classroom for Miss Lien this T suggests how to write evening. Ss follow to the teacher Nga: Ok. Would you like to come with us to the cafeteria, Lan? Lan: Sorry. I’m giong to the movie theater. Have a good time. T has ss listen to the passage Ss listen II/LANGUGE FOCUS (2.5 m) T gives the answer 1.C 2.C 3.A 4.C 5.B 6.B 7. A Ss copy down 8. D 9. B 10.B 11. B 12. C III/. READING * A. Read the passage carefully and decide * B. Answer(2,0 m) * .0,5 mark for each right answer 1. The bell rings at the twenty-five past nine. 2. Yes, they are. 3. The most popular activity is talking. 4. Yes,it is. IV/. WRITING (2.5 m) A. Put the adverbs in brackets into the right places.

(92) 1.They usually watch television in the evening. 2.This boy often plays soccer every afternoon. 3. I am never late for school. B. Making suggestions following the words EX: read a book. What about reading a book? Let’s read a book. Why don’t you read a book? 1. Listen to music. ………………………………………….. 3. Come to my house. ………………………………………. 4. Consolidation Ss read all parts in the test 5. Homework: Prepare Unit 7 A 1 EXPERIMENTS: ........................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................... Từ ngày 12/11/2012 đến ngày 17/11/2012. Week: 14 Period: 40. UNIT 7. THE WORLD OF WORK A. A STUDENT’S WORK (1). I. Objectives: Knowledge: - At the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know what a student often do at school and after school. Skills: reading, very less listening, writing and speaking. Education: Ss have a plan do at school and after school. II. Language content * Grammar: Future simple tense (review) * Vocabulary: Words relating to the work and vacations III. Techniques Asking and answering, listening, playing the roles, work in pairs, eliciting. IV. Teaching aids: Aiding boarbs, pictures, smart pen. V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and checking attendance:.

(93) 2- Review of the previous lesson: - Tell the top ten most ppopular activities of American teenagers. - write five activities that you like doing in your free time.. 3- New lesson: Teacher’s and students’ activities * Warm up : T greets and call some ss to answer the questions. Ss raise the hand to do T writes Ss’ suggested time on the board. T says: “We will listen to a dialogue between Hoa and her uncle. She’s talking to her uncle about her study”. * Presentation: Students listen to the smart pen. T asks Ss if there are new words/ phrases and explains them. * Controlled practice: Ss practice the dialogue in pairs. * Pair work (practicing the dialogue) T asks ss to read the questions and answer them. Ss answer the questions in groups of two. T calls some ss to asks and answer the questions before class. Ss works in pairs. T corrects.. Content + What time do your classes start? + What time do they finish? + For how many hours a day do you work 1. Listen. Then practice with a partner. New words/ phrases: New words/ phrases: - to be late for school (v): trễ học - last (v) kéo dài - almost (adj) gần như - during (prep.) - school year (n) - to be late for sth: trễ cái gì ->To be late for school: trễ học - It/ That takes about….Mất khoảng.. Answer: a. Hoa’s classes start at 7 o’clock. b. They finish at a quarter past eleven. c. Hoa does her homework 2 hours a day. d. She will visit her parents on their farm during her vacation. e, f, g. Students’ answers.. 4 - Consolidation: T asks ss to tell the class something about their work at school 5. Homework - T helps Ss write three sentences about the Ss’ work, prepare A2 EXPERIMENTS: ........................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................... Week 14. Signature. Trần Quốc Hương.

(94) Từ ngày 26/11/2012 đến ngày 1/12/2012 Week: 15 Period: 41 UNIT 7. THE WORLD OF WORK A. A STUDENT’S WORK (2,3) I. Objectives: Knowledge: - Talking about vacations in America. Skills: - Developing speaking, listening and reading skills. Education: not available II Language content : * Grammar: Future simple tense (review) * Vocabulary: Words relating to the work and vacations III. Techniques Asking and answering, listening, playing the roles, work in pairs, eliciting. IV. Teaching aids: Aiding boarbs, pictures, smart pen. V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and checking attendance: 2- Review of the previous lesson: Play the roles. Answer 4 questions about Hoa.. 3- New lesson: Teacher’s and students’ activities * Warm up: T greets and calls some ss to tell the class about their daily activities and what day they have off. * Pre – reading: Ss are asked to talk about the vacations and holidays (in Vietnam) and what they do during the holidays. T asks: “Who writes this letter and to whom? Ss read the letter silently and answer the T’s questions. Then take notes of vacations in America, the activities of American students. T explains new words. Ss take notes * While-reading: T has ss read Ss read in individual T has ss answer Ss answer the questions. Content What do the students do everyday? What day do they have off? 2. Read. Then answer the questions. -celebrate(v)tổ chức -few->fewer: ít hơn - spend time with: - Easter: Lễ Phục sinh - Thanksgiving: Lễ tạ ơn New structure: more/ fewer vacation than.... The longest vacation..... Ex: You have fewer vacations than American students. S1 + V + fewer/ more + countable noun +Than +S2 S1 + V + less/ more + uncountable noun +Than +S2.

(95) * Post – reading: * Pair work Ss ask and answer questions about vacations and holidays. T corrects the answers. Ss copy down. * Pre-listening: T asks ss to identify the actions of each picture. Ss identify the actions of each picture. Reviewing vocabulary and explaining new words:. * While-listening: T has ss listen Ss listen T has ss compare the asnwer in pairs Ss compare the answer in pairs * Post-listening: T has ss give the answer Ss give the answer T corrects. Answer: a. Summer vacation is the longest in America. b. During his vacation, Tim spends time with his family. c. Vietnamese students have fewer vacations than American students.. 3. Listen. Write the name of the public holiday in each of these pictures. + Easter + Thanksgiving + Christmas + New Year - New words: - public holiday: ngày lễ. - turkey(n) gà tây - firework display(n) bắn pháo hoa. Answer: a. Thanksgiving b. Independence Day c. New Year’s Eve (Day) d. Christmas. Tape transcription Tim enjoys all the public holidays. At Christmas, he always gets a lot of gifts. Thanksgiving is an important celebration, and there is always turkey and lots of good food. In Tim’s hometown, there is always a large fireworks display on Independence Day. Tim likes New Year because hw can stay up until midnight and celebrate with his parents Easter(Phục sinh): là ngày lễ quan trọng của Thiên Chúa giáo rơi vào ngày cuối tuần cuối tháng 3 (hoặc) đầu tháng 4. Vào những ngày này tín đồ Thiên Chúa giáo chào mừng sự sống lại của chúa Giê Su (Jesus). Lễ Easter gồm ngày “Good Friday” đến “Easter Monday”. Hình ảnh tiêu biểu cho những ngày này là trứng được sơn nhiều màu sắc vui mắt (Easter eggs), và hình thỏ con (Easter Bunny). Quả trứng tượng trưng cho sự sinh sôi, tạo hóa và sự sống mới. Thỏ mang các quả trứng được sơn nhiều màu sắc đến cho trẻ em và giấu đi cho các em tìm kíếm, giống như ông già Nô-el mang quà trong ngày Giáng sinh. Thanksgiving (Lễ tạ ơn): được tổ chức ở Hoa Kỳ vào ngày thứ Năm của tuần thứ tư của tháng 11. Đó là một ngày lễ trong đó mọi thành viên trong gia đình ăn một bữa ăn truyền.

(96) thống gồm có thịt gà tây, gà nhồi, xốt Cranbery, khoai lang, bánh mì bắp, rau luộc và bánh nhân bí. 4th of July: ngày Quốc khánh Hoa Kỳ 4 - Consolidation: - The days off in Vietnam and the USA. May Day, National/ Independence Day, Tet holiday, Thanksgiving,… Give example about comparative and superlative of adjectives 5. Homework Learn the words by heart, practice reading the lesson and prepare Unit 7 A 4 EXPERIMENTS: ........................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................... Từ ngày 24/11/2012 đến ngày 1/12/2012 Week: 15 Period: 42 UNIT 7. THE WORLD OF WORK A. A STUDENT WORK (4). I. Objectives: Knowledge: - Talking about the Ss’ work at school and at home. Skills: - Developing speaking, listening and reading skills. Education: Students how to arrange the time to work at school and at home. II. Language content * Grammar:Present simple tense * Vocabulary: Words relating to the topics “ At school, After school, Work and play” III. Techniques: Asking and answering, give a speech, explanation. IV. Teaching aids: textbook, smart pen. V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and checking attendance: 2- Review of the previous lesson: No exam. 3- correct the test Teacher’s and students’ activities * Warm up: T leads in with some questions. Ss listen and answer. T asks ss to work in pair to discuss these questions.. Content + What do you do every day? + Is your work at school hard or easy ? + How many hours a day do you study ? + Do you have to do a lot of.

(97) Ss work in pair to do. * Pre – reading: T asks Ss to talk about the work. Ss read the text the first time T(Ss) show(s) some new words in the reading. T gives meanings of words in context * While reading: Ss read the text silently and find the information to answer the questions in textbook. * Pair work: Ss ask and answer questions about the Ss’ work. T corrects the answers.. homework ? + Do you like that ?  We are going to read a passage about Hoa – a typical grade 7 student in Viet Nam. And we will know how she studies. 4. read. Then answer the questions. * New words : + take a look = look at (v) + typical ( adj)điển hình, tiêu biểu + review (v)ôn tập + definitely ( adv )chắc chắn +easy life(a)b cuộc sống đơn giản + hard(adv)chăm chỉ, vất vả +keen(a) nhạy bén, +lazy(a)lười biến Note : fewer/less …. than …… : ít hơn more …… than ……. : nhiều hơn  they are used to compare nouns * Post – reading: *Questions: T has ss make sentences with fewer , more a) Because they only work a few hours a day and have long vacations. b) Hoa works 20 hours a week. It is fewer than most workers’ work c) ( student’s answer ) d) No.The writer doesn’t think students are lazy. 4. Consolidation T reminds ss of a typical student’s work: study at school about 20 hours a week; 12 hours of homework every week; review work before test. Total: about 45 hours, more than some workers. 5. Homework: Practice reading the lesson, Prepare Unit 7 B1. Từ ngày 12/11/2012 đến ngày 17/11/2012. Week: 15 Period: 43. UNIT 7. THE WORLD OF WORK B. THE WORKER (1) + TEST 15 MINS.

(98) I. Objectives: Knowledge: - Talking about the work of Mr. and Mrs. Jones. Skills: - Developing speaking, listening and reading skills. Education: not available. II. Language content * Grammar: - Simple tense (review) * Vocabulary: - Words relating to the work. - Comparative: fewer days off than… III. Techniques Asking and answering, reading, playing the roles, work in pairs, eliciting. IV. Teaching aids: Aiding boarbs, pictures, smart pen. V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and checking attendance: 2- Review of the previous lesson: No checking. 3- New lesson: Teacher’s and students’ activities Content * Warm up : T greets and calls some ss to tell class Chatting: about sudent’s work and answer some study the lesson. questions do homework. help their parents. prepare the lesson. do the housework. +How many days do you go to school a Ss look at the form of a letter. week? Ss listen to the smart pen once and take + How many hours do you work at school a notes some details about the jobs of Mr. week? and Mrs. Jones. T explains new words. Ss copy down. T explains and gives meaning of words in the context. Ss listen and take notes 1. Listen and read. Then answer the questions.. * While – reading:. New words: - part-time:bán thời gian - Homeless (adj): không nhà cửa, vô gia cư - mechanic(n): thợ máy - prefer(v): thích hơn - morning shift: ca sáng.

(99) Ss are asked to read the text silently. - days off (n) ngày nghỉ Ss read the text silently and find the - golf (n) chơi gôn information to answers questions in text - shift work (n) thay đổi ca/ công việc book. T has ss ask and answer * a three - week summer vacation Ss ask and answer * He has fewer days off than my mother T corrects the answers. * a three - week summer vacation * He has fewer days off than my mothe Answer: a. Mrs. Jones works at home. But three morning a week she works part-time at a local supermarket. * Post – reading: b. She (together with other women) cooks T has ss read the leter before the class. lunch for homeless people once a week. Ss read. c. Mr. Jones is a mechanic. He repairs T corrects. machines in a factory. d. He works about 40 hours a week. e. The Johns family always goes to Florida on vacation. They have a great time there. 4 - Consolidation: Answer: - What’s your father’s job? - Where does your father work? - What’s your mother’s job? - Where does your mother work? - How many time a day do they work? 5. Homework - T helps Ss write three sentences about the Ss’ work, prepare Unit 7 B 2,3,4 FIFTEEN MINUTES TEST I. Where do they work? Circle the correct answer for each of the following sentences. (3m) 1. Mr. Nam is a farmer. He works on a… a. hospital b. school c. post office d. farm 2. Mrs. Nga is a doctor. She works in a… a. hospital b. school c. post office d. farm 3. His father is a worker. He works in a… a. hospital b. school c. post office d. factory 4. Mrs. Hoa is a librarian. She works in a… a. hospital b. school c. library d. farm 5. Lan’s elder brother is a journalist. He writes for a… a. hospital b. magazine c. post office d. library 6. She is a …………… . She work in a hospital. a. teacher b. dentist c. fireman d. artist II. Complete the sentences with “ more…than; fewer …than; less…than” : (7ms) Example: He works 72 hours a week. His wife works 56 hours a week.  He works more hours than his wife..

(100)  His wife works fewer hours than he. 1. I have 20 books. My friend has 18 books.  My friend has …………… books ………… I.  I have ………….. books …………… my friend. 2. Lan drinks 2 glasses of milk a day. Nga drinks 3 glasses of milk a day.  Nga drinks …………… milk …………. Lan.  Lan drinks ……………. milk …………. Nga. 3. Hoa has 4 vacations a year. Tim has 6 vacations a year.  Hoa has ……………. vacations …………… Tim.  Tim has ……………. vacations …………… Hoa. 4. Mr. Tuan has four days off a month. His wife has eight days off a month.  Mr. Tuan has …………. days off …………… his wife. Answer: I. Where do they work? Circle the correct answer for each of the following sentences (3m) 1. d 2. a 3. d 4. c 5. b 6. b Every sentence is 0,5m II. Complete the sentences with “ more…than; fewer …than; less…than” : (7ms) 1. fewer …than; more…than; 2. more…than; less…than; 3. fewer …than; more…than; 4. fewer …than - Every sentence is 1m Week 15 EXPERIMENTS: ........................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................ Signature. Trần Quốc Hương. Từ ngày24/11/2012 đến ngày 1/12/2012 Week: 16 Period: 44.

(101) UNIT 7. THE WORLD OF WORK B. THE WORKER (2,3,4). I. Objectives: Knowledge: - - Talking about the activities of a farmer.Helping the Ss compare the worker’s activities with the farmer’s activities (hours per week, days off, vacation, time) Skills: - Developing speaking, listening and reading skills. Education: To make the students aware of the importance of working. II Language content : * Grammar: - The comparison: fewer… than; more … than * Vocabulary: - Words relating to the job, vacations III. Techniques Asking and answering, listening, playing the roles, work in pairs, eliciting. IV. Teaching aids: Aiding boarbs, pictures, smart pen. V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and checking attendance: 2- Review of the previous lesson: Ss read Tim’s letter. Then answer the questions: a. How many people are there in Tim’s family. (four) b. What does Tim’s father do? (mechanic) c. Where does he work? (in a factory) d. What does Tim’s mother do?(housewife). 3- New lesson: Teacher’s and students’ activities * Warm up: T greets and call some ss to tell something about their parents’ work. And one to retell the work of Mr and Mrs Jones Ss raise the hand to do * Pre – reading: T introduces the lesson Ss listen T elicits new words Ss take notes * While-reading: T has ss read Ss read in individual T has ss answer Ss answer the questions * Post – reading: * Pair work Ss ask and answer questions about vacations. Content. 2. Read New words : + feed (v) cho ăn + buffalo (n) con trâu + buffalo shed (n) chuồng trâu + real (adj ) thật sự + collect (v) thu nhật, thu lượm + rest (v) phần còn lại + crop (n) vụ mùa + main crop (n) vụ mùa chính + chicken coop (n).

(102) and holidays. T corrects the answers. Ss copy down.. * Pre-listening: T asks ss to identify the actions of each picture. Ss identify the actions of each picture. Reviewing vocabulary: * While-listening: T has ss listen Ss listen T has ss compare the asnwer in pairs Ss compare the answer in pairs * Post-listening: T has ss give the answer Ss give the answer T corrects. Answer: 1. He’s a farmer. 2. He works in the fields. 3. He starts his work at about nine o’clock. 4. Four or five times a year. 3. Compare Hours per week 40. Days off. Vacation time Mr. two A Jones threeweek summer vacation Mr. 84 One-four No real Tuan or five vacation times a year 4. Listen and take notes. + Duty à to be on duty: làm việc + Annual (adj) : hàng năm. Answer: Name. Job. Peter Doctor Susan Nurse Jane Shop assistant Phong Factory worker. Hours per week 70 50 35. Amount of vacation 4 weeks 3 weeks 1 week. 48. 2 weeks. 4. Consolidation Teacher reminds ss of the typical activities of a farmer and a mechanic. 5. Homework - Learn new words at home; Do exercise B3 (workbook/page 46); Prepare Unit 8-A1, 2 EXPERIMENTS: ........................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................... Từ ngày 12/11/2012 đến ngày 17/11/2012.

(103) Week: 16 Period: 45. UNIT 8. PLACES A. ASKING THE WAY (1,2). I. Objectives: Knowledge: - Asking the way to somewhere Skills: - Developing speaking, listening and reading skills. Education: Students know how to ask the way II. Language content * Grammar: - Polite request with: “Could you …?” * Vocabulary: souvenir shop, railway station … Expression for asking for and giving directions. - Giving the correct names of some places. III. Techniques: Asking and answering, eliciting, work in pairs, playing the roles. IV. Teaching aids: textbook, smart pen V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and checking attendance: 2- Review of the previous lesson: Ss read the text (B 2 – page 77) Answer these questions: a. What does Mr, Tuan do? (a farmer) b. What time does he start his work? (nine a.m.) c. What time does he come back home? (at four p.m) d. How many times a year does Mr. Tuan take a day off? (four or five times). 3- correct the test Teacher’s and students’ activities * Warm up: T asks Ss match the words in column A with the correct columnb. Ss do the exercises.. T leads in with some questions. Ss listen and answer. Review names of service places. T has Ss look at the picture of buildings and name those. Content. * Matching: A 1) to swim. 2) to catch bus. 3) to see a doctor. 4) to buy food. 5) to read books. 6)to send a letter. * Answers: 1-c, 2-d, 3-b, 4-a, 5-f, 6-e.. B a) market b) clinic c) pool d)bus stop e)post office f) library.

(104) buildings. Ss identify the places and give names of the places. T corrects mistakes if necessary.. 1. Name the places Answer: a. National Bank of Vietnam (In Hanoi) (picture) b. Saint Paul Hospital(in Ha Noi) (picture) c. Hotel (in Ha Noi) T plays the tape and asks Ss listen d. The Central Post Office (in Ha Noi) to the dialogue. (picture) T gives practice in asking the way e. Hanoi Railway Station (picture) and giving directions. f. Dong Xuan Market (in Ha Noi)(picture) T has Ss look at the picture and 2. Listen and repeat. Then practice the guess. dialogue with a partner. + Who are they? + What does the tourist want? (Students answer) T introduces the situation: We are going to hear a conversation between Nga and a foreigner. A tourist asks the way. You listen and answer this question: “Where does the tourist want to go?” - T explains new words * New words: - Ss copy down - souvenir shop (n) T asks Ss to listen to the smart pen - railway station (n) again and repeat. - go straight ahead T introduces expressions for - Is there …… near here? asking for and giving directions: - Could you show me how to get there / to the Ss practice in pairs the dialogue and post office, please? change the role. - Could you tell me the way to the - T has Ss listen to the dialogue b. supermarket? (Precede the above steps with dialogue b.) - T has Ss practice each others (free practice) - Ss work in pairs. 4. Consolidation - Reminds the Ss of prepositions of position and expression for asking for and giving directions. 5. Homework - Learn by heart A2/ Page 80 EXPERIMENTS: ........................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................

(105) ........................................................................................................................... Từ ngày 12/11/2012 đến ngày 17/11/2012. Week: 16 Period: 46. UNIT 8. PLACES A. ASKING THE WAY(3). I. Objectives: Knowledge: - Asking for and giving directions to some places. Skills: - Developing speaking, listening and reading skills. Education: Students know how to ask and answer the way II. Language content * Grammar: - Polite request with: “Could you …?” * Vocabulary: souvenir shop, railway station … - Expression for asking for and giving directions. - Giving the correct names of some places. III. Techniques Asking and answering, reading, playing the roles, work in pairs, eliciting. IV. Teaching aids: Aiding boarbs, pictures, smart pen. V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and checking attendance: 2- Review of the previous lesson: T asks ss about the sentences use to ask the way. 3- New lesson: Teacher’s and students’ activities * Warm up : T calls ss to answer some questions. Ss raise the hand to do. T has Ss look at the street map. Ss identify different places. T has Ss listen careful and repeat chorally. T demonstrates the dialogue with two Ss. Ss practice with given cues in the box. ( alternating roles) T guides Ss practice in pairs. T calls on 2 pairs to perform their task. Ss give comments on their friends’ performance.. Content Chatting Where is the.............? Could you tell / show me the way how to go to … ? * Now there are 8 places in the box. Look at the street map to say their posittion. 3. Look at this street map. Practice the dialogue with a partner Ex: Where is the bank ? - The bank is between the hotel and the restaurant. It’s opposite the hospital.. Now, look at the street map again. Listen.

(106) T gives corrections of help. T asks Ss to look at the map above. T uses one of the places in the map and makes sentences that show the way to go there. T explains the requirement. T has Ss listen twice. Ss try to remember the places in the map (giving directions) T has Ss listen again à gives corrections. Ss listen, give names, check.. and write the paces. a. Go straight ahead to the second street. Turn left. What is on the right? (The souvenir shop.) b. Go Straight ahead. Turn right into the first street. What is on the left next to the restaurant? (The shoe store) c. What is on your left? (The hotel) d. Go the second street. Turn right. What is opposite the hotel?(The drugstore) e. What is on your right?(The hospital) Answer: a. souvenir shop b. shoe store c. hotel d. drugstore e. hospital ( The street map, page 81). 4. Consolidation - Play the game: “I get lost” 5. Homework - Practice part A3 at home; Prepare A4, A 4,5 EXPERIMENTS: ........................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................... Week 16. Signature. Trần Quốc Hương.

(107) Từ ngày 12/11/2012 đến ngày 17/11/2012.

(108) Week: 17 Period: 47. UNIT 8. PLACES A. ASKING THE WAY (4,5). I. Objectives: Knowledge: - Talking about distances. Skills: - Developing writing, less speaking, listening and reading skills. Education: Students know how to ask and answer the way II Language content : * Grammar: - Question with: “Could you …?” - It takes + time + to-infinitive. * Vocabulary: - Words relating to the topi “Places” III. Techniques Asking and answering, listening, playing the roles, work in pairs, eliciting. IV. Teaching aids: Aiding boarbs, pictures, smart pen. V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and checking attendance: 2- Review of the previous lesson: Using the picture to ask Ss about the vocabulary A3 and the positions of the bank, the hospital.. 3- New lesson: Teacher’s and students’ activities * Warm up: T greets and call one student to ask the way to the drug store and one answers, using the street map in the book. Ss raise the hand to do T reviews the structure, asking about distances. T has Ss listen and repeat after the smart pen once or twice, then pick up the new words. T explains the new words. T asks Ss to practice in pairs T asks Ss to guess the distance between Hue and Ho Chi Minh City whether it is true or false. T asks Ss to read the questions asking about the distances. Ss look at the map and the table of distances. T gives more practice in asking for and giving distancesà gives model. Practice T has ss work in pairs. T calls on Ss to role play the dialogue. T makes any necessary corrections. T emphasizes the usage of the structures.. Content How far is it from …… to ……? 4. Listen and repeat. Then practice the dialogue with a partner. -. couch(n) xe chạy đường dài guest(n) khách. 5. Look at this table of distances in km. Ask and answer questions. How far is it from … to… ? It's (about)… km (kilometer(s)).

(109) Ss apply in real situation. The table of distances in km (page 82 4. Consolidation: Review structure: Asking about distances: How far is it from … to …? It’s (about) … km. 5. Homework: - Learn by heart dialogue of A4. - Prepare B1,2. EXPERIMENTS: ........................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................... Từ ngày 12/11/2012 đến ngày 17/11/2012 Week: 17 Period: 48. REVIEW FOR THE FIRST SEMESTER EXAMINATION. I. Objectives: Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to review: o The present simple tense; o The present progressive tense; o The future simple tense. Skills: - Developing writing, less speaking, listening and reading skills. Education: Not available II. Language content * Grammar: - Review III. Techniques: Asking and answering, eliciting, work in individual. IV. Teaching aids: lesson plan V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and checking attendance: 2- Review of the previous lesson: No checking. 3- correct the test Teacher’s and students’ activities * Warm up: T leads in with some questions. Ss listen and answer. - T asks ss about the tense:. Content - What’your name? - Where do you live? - What are you doing? - What will you do tonight?.

(110) + the use; + adverbs; + structures. - Ss answer. - T take notes on the board. - Ss copy.. A. The present simple tense * Use to express: the truth, present habit. * Adverbs: adverbs of frequency, every. * Structures: 1. Affirmative form: ( khẳng định) I /We/You/They + V.bare He/She/It + V-s/ es è  b, g, n, l, d, v, m, r +  f, k, p, t, ay, uy,+ s   phu âm + y  ies o, x, s, z, sh, ch + es . - T asks ss about the tense: + the use; + adverbs; + structures. - Ss answer. - T take notes on the board. - Ss copy.. - T asks ss about the tense: + the use; + adverbs; + structures. - Ss answer. - T take notes on the board. - Ss copy.. s      . (Be) à Am, is, are (Have) à Have, has 2. Negative form: ( Phủ định) I /We/You/They + DO NOT + V(Bare) He/She/It + DOES NOT + V-(Bare) * add NOT after Be 3. Interrogative form: ( Nghi vấn) DO / DOES + S + V.Bare? * Write Be before the Subjects * WH-questions: WH-questions + DO / DOES + S + V. Bare? B. The present progressive tense * Use to express: action that is happening at the speaking time. * Now, at the moment, at present, listen, look,… are used. * Structures: 1. Affirmative form( khẳng định) S + am/ is/ are + V – ing 2. Negative form( Phủ định) S + am/ is/ are + not + V-ing 3. Interrogative form ( Nghi vấn): Is/ Are + S + V-ing? C. The future simple tense 1. Affirmative form: (khẳng định) S + Will + V 2. Negative form: ( Phủ định) S + won’t + V 3. Interrogative form: ( Nghi vấn): Will + S + V ? * Wh questions + will + S + V ?. Exercises: -T gives the exercises -Ss do them individually - T calls some Ss to read the answer. 1. They usually (play) __________ catch at recess. 2. Does she always (skip) ________.

(111) before class. -Ss reads aloud - T calls other to comment and gives the correct answer. rope after school? 3. Look! Hung (jump) _________ in to the swimming pool. 4. What ______ you _________(do) next Saturday? 5. Tomorrow, Mai (invite) ________ all friends to her birthday. 6. My father (listen) ________ to the radio everyday. 7. Her sister (do) ___________ Math now. 8. Hoa (play) _______ the piano at the present. 9. Listen! The girl (play)_________ the guitar. 10. She (not visit) _______ her grandparents next weeken. * Answer: 1. play; 2. skip; 3. is jumping; 4. will- do; 5. will invite; 6. listens; 7. is doing;8. is playing; 9. is playing; 10. won’t visit. 4. Consolidation ss ask and answer about personal information. 5. Homework - Ss learn the structures by heart - prepare knowledge from unit 1 to unit 7 for the next period. EXPERIMENTS: ........................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................ Từ ngày 12/11/2012 đến ngày 17/11/2012 Week: 17 Period: 49. REVIEW FOR THE FIRST SEMESTER EXAMINATION. I. Objectives: Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to review: o Prepositions of position. o Question words o Exclamations Skills: - Developing writing, less speaking, listening and reading skills. Education: Not available II. Language content.

(112) * Grammar: - review III. Techniques Asking and answering, reading, work in individual, eliciting. IV. Teaching aids: Aiding boarbs, pictures. V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and checking attendance: 2- Review of the previous lesson: T asks ss about the sentences use to ask the way. 3- New lesson: Teacher’s and students’ activities * Warm up : T asks Ss answer T asks ss to name the prepositions of position they’ve learnt. Ss name the prepositions of position they’ve learnt. takes notes on the board. T asks ss to give some examples T asks ss to name the question words they’ve learnt. Ss name the question words they’ve learnt. T takes notes on the board.. T asks ss to copy. Content - Where is your book? - What is in front of the house? - Is this flower beautiful? 1. Prepositions of position - between - in front of - at - on - in - in the middle of - behind -… 2. Question words - What: What is your name? What is your job? What is your date of birth? What do/ does + S + do? - Where: Where do you live? Where are you from? - Which: Which grade are you in? Which subject do you like best? - Why: Why don’t you want to come? - When: When will the movie start? When’s your birthday? - Who: Who is that? 3. Exclamations What + a/ an + adj + N(singular noun)! What + adj + N(plural noun)!. T asks ss to write the structures of exclamations. Ss write the structures of exclamations. they’ve learnt. T corrects. T asks ss to give examples Ex: What a beautiful tree! Ss give examples What an interesting book! T asks ss to copy What nice dogs! 4. a few, a little A few : một ít (stands before countable nouns).

(113) A little : một ít(stands uncountable nouns) -T gives the exercises -Ss do them individually - T calls some Ss to read the answer before class. -Ss reads aloud - T calls other to comment and gives the correct answer 4. Consolidation 5. Homework - Ss learn the structures by heart - prepare knowledge from unit 1 to unit 7 for the next period. EXPERIMENTS: ........................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................... Week 17.

(114) Signature. Từ ngày 12/11/2012 đến ngày 17/11/2012 Week: 18 Period: 50. REVIEW FOR THE FIRST SEMESTER EXAMINATION Trần Quốc Hương. I. Objectives: Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to review: o Comparatives and Superlatives (Chú ý một số so sánh bất quy tắc). Skills: - Developing writing, less speaking, listening and reading skills. Education: Not available II Language content : * Grammar: - review III. Techniques Asking and answering, listening, work in individual, eliciting. IV. Teaching aids: Aiding boarbs, pictures. V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and checking attendance: 2- Review of the previous lesson: No checking. 3- New lesson: Teacher’s and students’ activities * Warm up: T make a situation Ss listen. Content - This book is 1,000 d. that book is 2,000 d So this book is cheaper than that book.. T asks ss to write the structures of 1. Comparatives of adjectives comparatives of adjectives on the board. a. Short adjectives ’ Notice some irregular comparisons. Ss write the structures of comparatives of S1 + to be + adj + er + than + S2 adjectives. T corrects. * good – better T asks ss to give examples. * little – less Ss give examples * many/ much – more * bad- worse T asks ss to copy b. Long adjectives S1 + to be + more + adj + than + S2 T asks ss to write the structures of superlatives of adjectives on the board. Notes: comparisons with nouns Notice some irregular comparisons. fewer, less, more Ss write the structures of superlatives of More : Nhiều hơn (stands before countable adjectives. nouns and uncountable nouns).

(115) T corrects. T asks ss to give examples. Ss give examples T asks ss to copy. Fewer : ít hơn(stands before countable nouns) Less : ít hơn(stands uncountable nouns) 2. Superlatives of adjectives a. Short adjectives S + to be + the adj + est * good – the best * little – the least * many/ much – the most * bad- the worst b. Long adjectives S + the most + adj. Exercises: -T gives the exercises -Ss do them individually - T calls some Ss to read the answer before class. -Ss reads aloud - T calls other to comment and gives the correct answer. 1. Orange juice is ___________ coffee (good). 2. Cars are ___________________ motorbikes (expensive). 3. Mai is _________ girl of three sisters. (beautiful). 4. The blue dress is ______________ the red one (cheap). 5. Watching television is _________________ reading books(interesting). 6. This apartment is _________________ for your family. (suitable). 7. Mount Everest is ______________ mountain in the world.(high). 8. Walking is _________________ running (slow). 9. A new house is __________ an old one ( expensive). 10. Motorbikes are __________ bicycles (fast). * Answer: 1. better than; 2.more expensive than; 3. the most beautiful; 4. cheaper than ; 5. more interesting; 6.the most suitable; 7.the highest; 8. slower than; 9. more expensive than; 10. faster than.. 4. Consolidation: 1. Use the correct form of the adjective in brackets to complete the sentences..

(116) a. This chair is (comfortable) than that chair. (Answer: more comfortable) b. The Nile is (long) river in the world. (Answer: the longest) c. This dress is (pretty) than that one. (Answer: prettier) d. Of all three sisters, Nga is (intelligent). (Answer: the most intelligent) e. Nam’s house is (beautiful) than Nga’s house. (Answer: more beautiful) f. The woman looks (pretty) than my mother. (Answer: prettier) g. This man is (happy) of all the three men. (Answer: the happiest) h. She has (many) books than I. (Answer: more) 5. Homework. Review the first semester examination EXPERIMENTS: ........................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................ Từ ngày 12/11/2012 đến ngày 17/11/2012 Week: 18 Period: 51. REVIEW FOR THE FIRST SEMESTER EXAMINATION. I. Objectives: Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to review: o Is there a…? và Are there any…? o Ordinal numbers o Ask and answer about the time. o Some types of exercises Skills: - Developing writing, less speaking, listening and reading skills. Education: Not availble II. Language content * Grammar: - review III. Techniques: Asking and answering, eliciting, work in individual. IV. Teaching aids: Cassette recorder and tape..

(117) V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and checking attendance: 2- Review of the previous lesson: No checking. 3- Revision Teacher’s and students’ activities * Warm up: T leads in with some questions. Ss listen and answer. T asks ss about the structures T asks ss to write the structures on the board. Ss write the structures on the board. T corrects. T asks ss to give some examples. Ss give examples. * Notice the answer.. Content What is there near your house? How many people are in your family? What’s the date? 1. Is there a…? and Are there any…? a. Is there a…? (Answer: Yes, there is/ No, there isn’t) we use singular nouns Ex: Is there a book on the table? Is there a desk in your bedroom? … b. Are there any…? (Answer: Yes, there are/ No, there aren’t) We use plural nouns Ex: Are there any books in the bag? Are there any armchairs in the living room? …. T asks ss to read the ordinal numbers 2. Ordinal numbers and cardinal (page 24-English book) numbers (review) 3. Ask and answer about the time. T asks ss about the time. Ask: What time is it? T reminds ss of some ways to says Answer: about the time. * Normal: It’s + số giờ + số phút * Odd time: It’s + số phút + to/past + số giờ * Even time: It’s + số giờ + o’clock NOTE: T notices ss some other special cases. A B Â *) Nếu kim phút ở trong khoảng từ hơn 12 giờ đến 6 giờ (phần B) thì nói giờ lố. *) Nếu kim phút ở trong khoảng từ hơn hơn 6 giờ đến dưới 12 giờ (phần A) thì nói giờ kém. *) 15 phút = a quarter.

(118) *) 30 phút = half 4. Some types of exercises a). Choose the best option to complete each of the following sentences T reminds ss of some types of Circle or cross the letter before the exercises that may have in the final correct answer test. Ex: Mai…a student. a. are b. is c. am The answer is b b). Read a text and check True or False T gives example and asks ss to do the boxes them. Review the reading text T corrects if necessary. c) Write complete sentences using the . words given. Ex: Nam/ tall/ than/ Hoa Nam is taller than Hoa. d) Write the correct tense of the verb in brackets Ex: Hung usually (play)…soccer on Saturday afternoon. The answer is PLAYS e) Listen and complete the text 4. Consolidation Exercises : Answer the questions: - Is it half past eight? - What time is it now? - Is there a river near your hous? - Are there any trees behind your house? Exercises:Supply the verb in the bracket 1.Would you like (join) ______ our club? 2.Children shouldn’t (stay) __________ up late. 3.Let’s (go) _________ to the English club. 4. Why don’t you (invite) ___________ him? 5. What about (read) _______ in the library? 6. Should you (come) _________ there? 7. She is good at(draw) ______ pictures. 8. We live ________ 451 Tran Phu Street. 9. Her birthday is _________ Friday, August 20th 10. She will be 13 ______ her next birthday. * Answer: 1.to join; 2. stay; 3. go; 4. invite; 5. reading ; 6. come; 7. drawing; 8.at ; 9. on; 10.on 5. Homework. Prepare the first semester examination EXPERIMENTS: ............................................................................................................................

(119) ........................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................ Từ ngày 12/11/2012 đến ngày 17/11/2012 THE FIRST SEMESTER EXAMINATION. Week: 18 Period: 52. I. Objectives: Knowledge: Check students’ knowledge from Unit 1 to Unit 8 Skills: - Developing writing, less speaking, listening and reading skills. Education: Not availble II. Language content Grammar and vocabulary (review). II. Matrix Nội dung Nhận biết TN TL I. Language focus. III. Writing. . option A, B C or D Read the passage about Nam and his younger brother Answer the questions. Use the words or phrases to. 1.0. 4. 4. 12. 1.0. 1.0. 3.0=30%. 5. 5. 2.5. 2.5=25% 4. IV. Listening. wrire into the complete sentences Listen. Then check () the boxes. 4. 2.0. 2.0=20%. 5 2.5 4. Tổng số:. Tổng số:. Choose the best 4. II. Reading. Vận dụng cấp Thông hiểu độ thấp TN TL TN TL. 1.0. 9 3.5. 4. 9. 1.0. 4.5. 5 2.5=25% 26 10.00 =100%.

(120) Tran Van Thoi Junior High School Name: ................................ Class: 7……. THE FIRST SEMESTER EXAMINATION Subject: English Grade 7 Duration: 45 minutes School year: 2011-2012. ĐỀ CHÍNH THỨC Mark(s). Teacher’s comments. I. Language focus Choose the best option to complete each of the following sentences. (3.0ms) 1. … does Hoa live? – She lives in Hue. a. Where b. What c. When d. How 2. Nam … 14 on his next birthday. a. is b. will be c. be d. will 3. Every day Mr. Lam … in the fields from 6 am to 6 pm. a. work b. working c. works d. to work 4. This toy is … than that one. a. expensive b. cheap c. the most expensive d. more expensive 5. He is a journalist. He writes for a … a. library b. factory c. magazine d. stadium 6. Is there a… in your bathroom? – Yes, there is. a. bed b. shower c. television d. bookshelf 7. What time does the library open? – It opens at … a. seven thirty b. seven to thirty c. thirty seven d. seven past thirty 8. Mai learns how to use a … in her Computer Science class. a. refrigerator b. computer c. car d. machine 9. Let’s … to my house for dinner. a. going b. goes c. go d. to go 10. … an old bike! a. Where b. When c. How d. What 11. Ba is in his room. He … the guitar now. a. is playing b. is playing c. play d. will play 12. Mr. Hoang always … to work. a. walk b. go c. ride d. drives II. Reading Read the text carefully Nam and his younger brother enjoy different activities after school hours. Nam wants to be an actor. Acting is his favorite pastime. He is a member of the school theater group. At present, his group is rehearsing a play for the school anniversary celebration. He also plays soccer and volleyball in his free time..

(121) Ba’s pastimes are different from his elder brother. He is not very sporty. After school, he usually goes home and watches TV. Sometimes he reads a library book or comics but most of the time he lies on the couch in front of the TV. Answer the following questions. (2.5ms) 1. What does Nam want to be? ..................................................................................................................................... 2. What is his favorite pastime? ..................................................................................................................................... 3. What is his group doing at present? ..................................................................................................................................... 4. Is Ba very sporty? ..................................................................................................................................... 5. What does he usually do after school? ..................................................................................................................................... III. Writing Rewrite the following sentences with the cue words. (2.0ms) 1. Why don’t we go to Huong pagoda this summer? What about...........................................................................? 2. Should we play marbles at the recess? Why don’t we.......................................................................? 3. What about playing soccer? Let’s .................................................................................... 4. What is her address? Where does ......................................................................... ? IV. Listening Listen. Then check () the boxes. (2.5m) Ba. Mai. Lan. Kien. Nam. Activities go to the circus go to the school cafeteria watch a movie tidy the classroom rehearse a play. -- THE END –. Tran Van Thoi Junior High School ĐỀ CHÍNH THỨC. THE ANSWER KEY I. Language focus. THE FIRST SEMESTER EXAMINATION Subject: English Grade 7 Duration: 45 minutes School year: 2011-2012.

(122) Choose the best option to complete each of the following sentences. (3.0ms).

(123) 1. a 2. b 3. c 4. d 5. c 6. b 7. a 8. b 9. c 10. d 11. a 12. d.

(124) (0.25m for each correct choice) II. Reading Answer the following questions. (2.5ms) 1. He wants to be an actor. 2. His favorite pastime is acting. / Acting is his favorite pastime. 3. At present, his group is rehearsing a play for the school anniversary celebration. 4. No, he isn’t. 5. After school, he usually goes home and watches TV. / He usually goes home and watches TV after school. (0.5m for each correct answer) III. Writing Rewrite the following sentences with the cue words. (2.0ms) 1. What about going to Huong pagoda this summer? 2. Why don’t we play marbles at the recess? 3. Let’s playing soccer. 4. Where does she live? (0.5m for each correct answer) IV. Listening Listen. Then check () the boxes. (2.5m) Ba. Mai. Lan. Kien. Nam.     . Activities go to the circus go to the school cafeteria watch a movie tidy the classroom rehearse a play. (0.5m for each correct answer) Nga: Mai, should we go to the school cafeteria? Mai: OK. That’s a great idea. Nga: What about you, Nam? Nam: Sorry. I have to rehearse for a play with the dramma group. Nga: Ba. Do you want to join us? Ba: Oh, no. I’m going to the circus to night with my family. Sorry. Nga: How about you, Kien? Kien: I’d love to, but I’m going to tidy the classroom for Miss Lien this evening. Nga: OK. Would you like to come with us to the cafeteria, Lan? Lan: Sorry. I’m going to the movie theater. Have a good time. Bye.. Week 18.

(125) Signature. Nguyễn Văn Đấu. THE FIRST SEMESTER EXAMINATION I/. LANGUAGE FOCUS (2.5 ms) Circle the best answer A, B, C or D 1. Let’s ……………….some stamps. A. collects B. tocollect C. collecting 2. ...................... nice colors! A. How B.Where C.What 3. We ................................. around the world next year. A. will travel B. to travel C. travels. D. collect D.Which D. travelling.

(126) 4. What will you do during your vacation? A. I often help my parents. C. I like to help my parents. B. I will help my parents. D. I help my parents. 5. Vietnamese students have ..........................vacations than American ones A. fewer B. longer C. most D. less 6. How .........................is it from Hue to Da Nang? A.long B. big C. far D. wide 7. Is there ………….…..in your bathroom? – Yes, there is. A. two shower B. showers C. a shower D. shower 8. It’s half past nine or we can say: A. nine to thirty B. nine thirty C. thirty nine D. nine past thirty 9. Mai learns how to use a…………….in her Computer Science class. A. computer B. refrigerator C. car D. machine 10. Would you like……………to my house for dinner? A. coming B. to come C. come D. to come II/. READING. (2.5 ms) Read the passage carefully: Mr Ha lives in a house near the sea. It’s an old house, about 100 years old, and it’s very small. There are two bedrooms upstairs but no bathroom. The bathroom is downstairs next to the kitchen and there’s a living room where there’s a lovely fireplace. There’s a garden in front of the house. The garden goes down to the beach and in spring and summer there are flowers everywhere. He lives with his dog, Boxer. His friends often stay with him. He loves his house for many reasons: the garden, the flowers in the summer , the fire in winter, but the best thing is the view from his bedroom window. A. True or false? Check ( X )the boxes. True False 1. Mr. Ha lives in a big house near the sea. 2. He has a dog. B. Answer the questions: 1. How many bedrooms are there in Mr. Ha’s house ? …………………………………………………………………………………………………… 2. Is the house old or new? …………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3. Where is the bathroom? …………………………………………………………………………………………………… 4. What is his dog’s name? …………………………………………………………………………………………………… III/. WRITING (2.5 ) Write the right sentences with the cues given. 1 is/ bigger/ than your school/ My school? 2. What / interesting / story/ an! 3. we/ play/ Should/ basketball?.

(127) 4. go / Let’s/ the cafeteria /to? 5. more /lemon juice/ than her sister/ Hoa/ drinks IV/. LISTENING (2.5 m) Listen and fill in each blank Mr Hoan is a farmer. He grows rice, vegetables and (1)……..… cattles. Every morning , he (2)………… starts work at six o’clock. He feeds the buffalo, pigs and (3)…………….and collects the eggs. From about nine in the morning until five in the afternoon, he (4)………… with his son, Quang in the field . But they rest and have lunch at twelve o’clock. At five in the afternoon, they come back home. Mr Hoan (5)……………. animals again. He often finishes work at a quarter past six. ANSWER KEY I/. LANGUAGE FOCUS (2.5 m) Mỗi câu đúng 0,25 điểm 1. D 2. C 3. A 4. B 5. A 6. C 7. C 8. B 9. A 10. D II/. READING. Read the passage carefully: A. True or false? Check ( X )the boxes. Mỗi câu đúng 0,25 điểm 1. F 2. T B. Answer the questions Mỗi câu đúng 0,5 điểm 1. There are two bedrooms. 2. It’s old. 3. The bathroom is downstairs next to the kitchen 4. It’s Boxer III/. WRITING (2.5 ) Write the right sentences with the cues given Mỗi câu đúng 0,25 điểm 1. My school is bigger than your school? 2. What an interesting story! 3. Should we play basketball? 4. Let’s go to the cafeteria? 5. Hoa drinks more lemon juice than her sister. IV/. LISTENING (2.5 m) Mỗi chỗ trống đúng 0,25 điểm Mr Hoan is a farmer. He grows rice, vegetables and (1) raises cattles. Every morning , he (2) usually starts work at six o’clock. He feeds the buffalo, pigs and (3) chickens and collects the eggs. From about nine in the morning until five in the afternoon, he (4) works with his son,.

(128) Quang in the field . But they rest and have lunch at twelve o’clock. At five in the afternoon, they come back home. Mr Hoan (5) feeds animals again. He often finishes work at a quarter past six. Week 18. Signature. Nguyễn Văn Đấu. Week: 19 Period: 52*. CORRECT THE 1st SEMESTER EXAMINATION. I. Objectives: Knowledge: Help ss find their mistakes in their test and five the correct answer Skills: - Developing writing, less speaking, listening and reading skills. Education: Not availble II Language content : Grammar and vocabulary (review from unit 1 to 8)) III. Techniques Give a speech, explanation, reading. IV. Teaching aids: Cassette recorder and tape. V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and checking attendance: 2- Review of the previous lesson: No checking. 3- Correct the test Teacher’s and students’ activities T shows some common mistakes Ss listen T has ss give the answer Ss give the answer T corrects and explains. Content. I/. LANGUAGE FOCUS (3.0 m) Mỗi câu đúng 0,25 điểm 1. a 2. b 3. c T reads and writes the answer and 4. d explains 5. c.

(129) Ss listen and copy down. T suggests how to write Ss follow to the teacher. T has ss listen to the passage Ss listen T gives the answer Ss copy down. 6. b 7. a 8. b 9. c 10. d 11. a 12. d II/. READING. II. Reading Answer the following questions. (2.5ms) 1. He wants to be an actor. 2. His favorite pastime is acting. / Acting is his favorite pastime. 3. At present, his group is rehearsing a play for the school anniversary celebration. 4. No, he isn’t. 5. After school, he usually goes home and watches TV. / He usually goes home and watches TV after school. (0.5m for each correct answer) III/. WRITING (2.5 ) Rewrite the following sentences with the cue words. (2.0ms) 1. What about going to Huong pagoda this summer? 2. Why don’t we play marbles at the recess? 3. Let’s playing soccer. 4. Where does she live? (0.5m for each correct answer) IV. Listening Listen. Then check () the boxes. (2.5m) Ba Mai Lan Kien Nam Activities  go to the circus  go to the school cafeteria  watch a movie  tidy the classroom  rehearse a.

(130) play (0.5m for each correct answer) Nga: Mai, should we go to the school cafeteria? Mai: OK. That’s a great idea. Nga: What about you, Nam? Nam: Sorry. I have to rehearse for a play with the dramma group. Nga: Ba. Do you want to join us? Ba: Oh, no. I’m going to the circus to night with my family. Sorry. Nga: How about you, Kien? Kien: I’d love to, but I’m going to tidy the classroom for Miss Lien this evening. Nga: OK. Would you like to come with us to the cafeteria, Lan? Lan: Sorry. I’m going to the movie theater. Have a good time. Bye.. 4. Consolidation: Ss read the test again. 5. Homework: - Prepare B1,2.. Week: 19 Period: 53. UNIT 8. PLACES B. AT THE POST OFFICE. (1,2). I. Objectives: Knowledge- By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to ask about prices. Skills: - Developing writing, less speaking, listening and reading skills. Education: Not availble II. Language content * Grammar: - Asking and answering about prices: “How much is/ are …?” * Vocabulary: words related to the topic : Places” III. Techniques: Asking and answering, eliciting, work in individual, work in pairs, playing the roles. IV. Teaching aids: lesson plan V. Procedures:.

(131) 1- Greeting and checking attendance: 2- Review of the previous lesson: No checking. 3- correct the test Teacher’s and students’ activities * Warm up: T leads in with some questions. Ss listen and answer. T elicits (using the picture): There are Liz and Clerk. -Where are they? (At the post office) What can you do at the post office? (I can send letters, post cards, send and receive parcels, money, make long/short distance telephone calls, buy envelopes, stamps). T explains new structures and vocabulary.. T has Ss listen à repeat after the tape. (optional) T guides Ss practice in pairs to perform in front is the class. T has ss read in silence to answer the questions à check à give out.. T explains the requirement. T introduces the situation of the dialogue: Nga and Hoa are going to the post office after school. Guess, what do they want to do? Ss guess. (free guess) T plays the tape and gets ss’ answers. T explains new words. T asks ss to read the dialogue in groups of two. Ss work in groups of two. T asks ss to perform the dialogue before the class. - T asks ss to ask and answer the questions in pairs. - T calls some pairs of ss to practice asking. Content - What is this? (stamp) - Where can we buy it? 1. Listen and read. Then practice with a partner.. - I’d like + V - How much is/ are…? - envelope(n) bì thư - altogether(adv): tổng cộng - change (n): tiền lẻ, thừa lại - cost(n): giá, có giá là - pay(v) trả tiền Practice Answer: a. Liz will mail the letter to the USA b. She pays 11,500 dong altogether. c. She receives 3,500 dong in change. d, e. Sts’ answer. 2. Listen and read. Then answer the questions. - mail(v) gửi thư - overseas(adj) ở nước ngoài - regularly(adv) thường xuyên - total (n) tổng, toàn bộ - local stamp(n) tem địa phương, trong nước Answer: a. Hoa needs some local stamps for overseas mail and a phone card. b. She needs stamps for overseas mail because she has a pen pal in America. c. She needs a phone card to call (phone) her.

(132) and answering the questions before the class. parents (one a week). - Ss practice asking and answering the questions before the class. - T corrects. Ss copy the answers. 4. Consolidation - Would like (’d like), want/ wants, need/needs + N/to-infinitive. - How much is/are + S? - How much do/does + S + cost? 5. Homework - Do exercise of B1, page 83. - Prepare B3, 4, 5... Week: 19 Period: 49. UNIT 8. PLACES B. AT THE POST OFFICE (3,4,5). I. Objectives: Knowledge: - Services at the post office. - Making purchases. Skills: - Developing writing, less speaking, listening and reading skills. Education: Not availble II. Language content * Grammar: - Asking for information about services at the post office. - Need to do some thing/ Need sth. - Writing the prices. * Vocabulary: a part from III. Techniques Asking and answering, reading, work in individual, eliciting, playing the roles, work in pairs. IV. Teaching aids: Aiding boarbs, pictures, smart pen. V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and checking attendance: 2- Review of the previous lesson: No checking. 3- New lesson: Teacher’s and students’ activities Content * Warm up : - Do you often send letters? T asks - How much is a local stamp? Ss answer T asks ss some questions about the previous 3. Complete the dialogue. Then make up.

(133) lesson. Questions: 1. What does Hoa need from the post office? 2. Why does she need stamps for oversea mail? 3. Why does she need a phone card? Ss answer. T explains the requirement. T has Ss read and complete the dialogue (page 84). T asks some pairs to read aloud their dialogue in front of the class. T offers help as necessary. T asks Ss to make similar dialogues in pairs, alternating roles. T calls some ss to perform new dialogues before the class. T has Ss look at the picture and introduces the situation: “Mrs. Robinson buys some things. Let’s listen and write the prices of each item”. (With take notes). T has Ss listen three time (books closed) T has Ss listen once more (books opened) T let ss answer the questions. T gives corrections: T gives practice in asking and answering questions. T has Ss ask and answer the questions in pairs. T explains new word. T calls some Ss to perform their task. T corrects ss’ mistakes. Ss copy the answers in their exercise books.4. Consolidation - Has some Ss read again the dialogue B3 5. Homework - Do the exercise B2, B3. - Prepare unit 9. A 1. similar dialogues; use the words in the box. Answer: Hoa: I would like five local stamps and two stamps for America. Clerk: Here you are. Is that all? Hoa: I also need a fifty thousand dong phone card. How much is that altogether? Clerk: That is seventy-five thousand dong. Hoa: Here is eighty thousand dong. Clerk: Thanks. Here’s your change.. 4. Listen and write the price of each of these five items. Answer: The total cost is 59,000 dong. She will have 1,000 dong in change. 5. Answer the following questions - a part from: (adv): ngoại trừ Answer: a. It is 800 dong to mail a local letter in Vietnam. b. A letter to America costs (11,500 dong.) c. A part from stamps, the post office also sells envelops, telephone cards,… d. Students’ answers. Week 19 Signature. Trần Quốc Hương.

(134) Week:1 (20) Period: 55. UNIT 9: AT HOME AND AWAY A. A HOLIDAY IN NHA TRANG (1). I. Objectives Knowledge: Talking about Liz’s resent vacation. Talking about the activities in the past. Skills : listening, speaking very less reading and writing Educational : Not available II. Language contents * Grammar: - The past simple tense with irregular verbs. * Vocabulary: - Words relating to the vacation (vacation, gift) III. Techniques - Role play - Questions – answers - Arrangement. IV. Teaching aids Pictures, real thing, smart pen V. Procedures 1- Greeting and taking the attendance 2- Review of the previous lesson: Using the pictures (Unit 8 A1 or A5) Questions and answers - Would you like to go there? - Do you often go three? - How far is it from your house? - Who was there? - Are there any interesting places or any souvenir shops? 3- New lesson: Teacher’s and Ss’activities. * Questions – Answers: - T: What do you often do on your summer holiday? - Ss: Answer - T: Do you often go to Nha Trang? - Ss: Answer - T : What do you do there?. Content 1. Listen. Then practice with a partner. *Warm up.

(135) - Ss: Go swimming, eat seafood, and take photos. *Presentation - T: Liz had a vacation in Nha Trang. Now she is talking to Ba about her resent vacation. Please listen to the tape to learn what Liz thought of Nha Trang? And what did Liz do there? - Ss: Listen to the smart pen once. * Teaching new words: (Using a real thing) - Ss listen and repeat after the smart pen - Ss: practice dialogue in pairs. * Teaching grammar: PAST SIMPLE TENSE WITH IRREGULAR VERBS - T: write down the sentences that use the simple past tense and explain how to use. -vacation = holiday (n) kì nghĩ -gift (n) quà -aquarium (n): bể/hồ cá. - T: tell me the places Liz visited and the things she did. - Ss: individual work. - Ss: listen to the smart pen again and check “number the sentences” (page 87). Now answer. Number the sentences. 3-Liz bought souvenirs. 2-Liz visited Tri Nguyen Aquarium. 4-Liz returned to Ha Noi. 1-Liz went to Nha Trang. 5-Liz talked to Ba about her vacation.. -The people were very friendly. -The food was delicious. -Most things weren’t cheap. -Did you buy any souvenirs in Nha Trang? Yes, I did. I bought a lot of different gifts for my friends in America. -Were you tired after the trip? No, I wasn’t. I had a great time. *Note: Did not = Didn’t was not = wasn’t - Ss: Listen and repeat the sentences were not = weren’t after the teacher.. - Ss: Make similar conversations about their activities on their past holidays. 4- Consolidation - T helps Ss read the sentences that use the simple past tense again. 5- Homework.

(136) - Write sentences about their activities on their past holidays with the simple past tense. -Prepare( A2,3). Week:1 (20) Period: 56. UNIT 9: AT HOME AND AWAY A. A HOLIDAY IN NHA TRANG (2,3). I. Objectives Knowledge : Talking about the activities Liz’s family at Tri Nguyen Aquarium. Talking about the journey of Robinson’s family. Skills : Developing listening,reading and speaking skills. Educational : Students should have a holiday with their family. II.Language contents * Grammar: - Review past simple tense with irregular verbs. - New teaching past tense with regular verbs. * Vocabulary: - Words relating to the (shark, dolphin, turtle, crab, cap poster) III. Techniques - Questions – answers - Story - telling IV. Teaching aids Pictures, smart pen V. Procedures 1- Greeting and taking the attendance. 2- Review of the previous lesson * Questions – Answers: - Where did Liz go on her vacation? - What did she think of Nha Trang? - When did Liz talk to Ba about her recent vacation? 3- New lesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content 2. Listen and read. Then answer the questions. - T: + Do you visit Nha Trang? + Where can you see the sea animals? + Have you come go Tri Nguyen Aquarium? - Students answer. - T: Now let’s come to Tri Nguyen Aquarium with Liz’s family. - Students listen to the smart pen with their books closed (once).

(137) - Students open their books and listen to the tape. * Review simple past tense of irregular Go – went See – saw verbs and teach new words. Think – thought Be (is/am/are)Buy – bought Was/were Wear – wore Have –had Eat – ate Put – put. -Shark(n): cá mập - Students read the text: -Turtle (n): con rùa + Silent reading -Dolphin (n): cá heo -Food stall: quầy thực phẩm -Crab (n) con cua -Cap(n): mũ lưỡi trai -Exit (n): lối ra, cửa ra * Questions - Answer Answer: - Students work in pair: answer the a. Her parents went to the aquarium with questions. her. - T calls some ss to practice before b. They saw sharks, dolphins, turtles and class. many different types of fish. - T corrects. c. They bought a cap and a poster. d. Yes, she did. Liz wore the cap all day. e. Yes. They ate fish and crab. f. Because she remembered the beautiful fish in the aquarium. *NOW TELL THE STORY OF LIZ’S TRIP TO THE AQUARIUM. BEGIN WITH: a. The Robinson family went to the - T explains the requirement. aquarium. - T shows the pictures. b. They saw sharks, dolphins, turtles and - Students tell the story of Liz’s trip to many colorful fish. the aquarium. c. There was a souvenir shop near the exit *Note: Use past form of the verbs. of the aquarium. - T calls some ss to perform before d. Mr. Robinson bought Liz a cap with a class. picture of a dolphin on it. Mrs. Robinson - Student: individual work. bought Liz a poster. - T corrects if necessary. e. After their visit to the aquarium, the Robinsons went to a food stall. Mr. Robinson and Mrs. Robinson ate fish and crab and Liz ate noodles. - T: 3. Listen. Write the letter of the sentences Did you go there? you hear. How do you go there? * Warm – up: (Picture of Nha Trang) Did the Robinsons come there? Chatting The Robinsons had a great holiday in.

(138) Nha Trang. - T says: Now listen to the smart pen carefully then check the answer in your books. - Students read 5 pairs of sentences in text book: a-b, c-d, e-f, g-h, i-j. - Students listen to the cassette careful and make a cross into the sentences the same contents in text book. - T plays the smart pen again. Answer: b-d-e-h-i - Ss: Close the book and listen. * Questions and answers: - T: Check the key. - Ss: Say the content again. 4- Consolidation: T and Ss repeat and remember information about the trip of Liz's family to Nha Trang. Remember past of verbs . 5- Homework - Review the vocabulary - Rewrite Liz’s story. - Prepare A4. Week:1 (20) Period: 57. UNIT 9: AT HOME AND AWAY A. A HOLIDAY IN NHA TRANG (4). I. Objectives Knowledge : Talking about Ba’s diary. Skills : Developing reading, writing skills to get information. Educational : Students how to talk about their dairy. II. Language contents * Grammar: - Past simple tense with irregular and regular verbs, simple present tense and simple future tense. * Vocabulary: - Review the words relating to listening. - improve, keep in touch III. Techniques - Questions – answers IV. Teaching aids Pictures, smart pen V. Procedures 1- Greeting and taking the attendance.

(139) 2- Review of the previous lesson (5’) Student(s) read(s) or tell(s) the story of Liz’s trip to Tri Nguyen aquarium. 3- New lesson: Teacher’s and students’ activities Content - T explains the requirement. 4. Read Ba’s diary - T asks Ss to read sentence a) to g). - T asks Ss to read Ba’s diary and check the sentences a) to g). - Ss read Ba’s diary and check the - improve (v) trau dồi sentences a) to g). - keep in touch (with someone) giử liên - T explains new words/phrases/ grammar lạc Past simple tense with regular verbs: adding ED when we change the regular verbs into their past form. A.TO BE: I/ He/ She/ It + was…. You/ They/ We + were…… (can/ could, may/ might, will/ would, shall/ should, must/ have to/ had to) *Phủ định: + not sau ToBe (wasn’t/ weren’t) *Nghi vấn: Was/ Were + S …? B. ORDINARY VERBS: + KĐ: S + V_ed/ V2 (irregular)….. + PĐ: S + DID NOT + V.Bare…… + NV: DID + S + V.Bare……? + WH: WH + DID + S + V.Bare….? *Regular verbs: Use 2nd column Answer: - T asks Ss to correct the incorrect a. Liz lived next door to Ba. sentences. b. Liz learned Vietnamese in Viet Nam. - T calls some Ss to read the correct c. Ba collects stamps. sentences before class. d. Liz’s aunt lives in New York. - T corrects Ss’ mistakes. e. The Robinsons moved to the other side of Ha Noi. f. The Robinsons moved. Now Ba is sad. g. Ba will see Liz next week. 4-. Consolidation - T reminds Ss of the simple past tense (regular verbs). 5- Homework - Prepare B1, 2.Do exercise A1, 2, 3, 4 – page 53-55 – English exercise book. Week: 20 Singnature:.

(140) Week:2 (21) Period: 58. UNIT 9: AT HOME AND AWAY B.NEIGHBORS (1,2). I. Objectives Knowledge : Talking about the activities in the past Skills : Developing reading and listening skills Educational : Students know how to tell the activites in the past. II. Language contents * Grammar: Past simple tense (review) * Vocabulary: hairdresser, material, dressmaker III. Techniques Question-answer IV. Teaching aids - Pictures. - Role cards - Read objects V. Procedures 1- Greeting and taking the attendance 2- Review of the previous lesson: Students go to the board and write the past form for each of these verbs: Arrive>…….arrived Help>……helped Have>…..had Go>…..went See>…saw 3- New lesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content 1. Listen. Then practice with a partner..

(141) *Warm – up - T (use the picture) asks Ss: Who are they? Where are they? What are they doing?. *Presentation. - T says: Now listen to the tape to get information from their conversation. - T plays the cassette recorder. - Ss repeat after the tape. - T aks: What are Lan and Hoa talking about? (dress, furniture) * Teaching new words: - Hairdresser(n): thợ uốn/ cắt tóc nữ (haircutter) - Material(n) : chất/ vật liệu - Dressmaker(n) : thợ may áo đàn bà Practice controlled - Ss read the dialogue. - T asks Ss to read the questions below the dialogue and answer them. - Ss: individual work - T calls some Ss to ask and answer the questions before class. Answer: - Ss work in pair. a. She’s a hairdresser. - T corrects. b. She’s a dressmaker. 2. Answer - T asks Ss to read the example. - T explains how to use past simple tense - T asks Ss to read the dialogue again Answer: to get information. a. No, she didn’t. - T calls some Ss to answer the b. No, she didn’t. questions before class. c. Yes, she did. 4- Consolidation Remind ss of the past simple tense. 5- Homework - Practice the dialogue at home. - Prepare B3,4 - Do exercise 4 page 54 – English exercise book. Week:2 (21) Period: 59. UNIT 9: AT HOME AND AWAY.

(142) B.Neighbors (3,4). I. Objectives Knowledge : Talking about what happened in the past Skills : Developing reading and writing skill. Educational : Students know how to tell what happened in the past. II. Language contents * Grammar: - Review past simple tense with regular and irregular verbs. - Learn how to do something. * Vocabulary: - Words relating to sewing (fit, cushion, sew, needlework) III. Techniques - Role – play - Story - telling - Questions – answers IV. Teaching aids - Pictures. - Role cards. - Real objects. V. Procedures 1-Greeting and taking the attendance 2- Review of the previous lesson: Students read the dialogueOr Teacher review the content of the dialogue by asking students some questions: What does Hoa’s aunt do? (Hairdresser) What did she do with Hoa’s hair? (She cut it) Who is Mrs. Mai? ( Hoa’s neighbor) What did she help Hoa? (She bought the material and made the dress for herdoll) 3- New lesson: Teacher’s and students’ activities Content 3. Read. Then answer *explain new words * Questions and answers: -T says: This is a needle and a thread. -sew(v) sewing(n) We use them to sew or mend clothes. Sewing machine Do you know how to sew? When you sew, you are doing needlework. Did you learn how to sew or mend clothes at school? Now scan the text and find out what Hoa made when she decided to learn how to.

(143) sew. - Students read the text and do task 1 (She made a cushion and a skirt) - Teacher explain new words Use a picture of a girl wearing a too small T – shirt and another wearing a too big T – shirt to teach the word “fit”. - Students list the actions happened during the text. - T notices students the past form of some verbs.. -material(n): chất/ vật liệu -hobby(n): sở thích riêng - try something on: thử cái gì - fit(v): vừa, hợp. Answer: - T asks ss to read the questions and a. She learned (how) to use a sewing answer them. machine. - Students compare their answers in b. She made a cushion for her armchair pairs. first. -T corrects the answers: c. It was blue and white. d. Next, she made a skirt. e. It was green with white flowers on it. f. It looked very pretty. g. She tried it on but it didn’t fit. h. Hoa’s neighbor helped her. i. Finally, it fitted very well. 4. Write. Put the verbs in brackets in the simple past tense. - T asks ss to read through the sentences. - T aks ss to use the past form of the verb in bracket. - Reviewing past tense forms of verbs (regular and irregular). - Briefly explaining how to pronounce – ED of regular verbs (/id/;/ t/;/d/) * Learn how to do something (How to swim, to cook, to ride a bike) -T asks ss to draw their attention to words indicating time order (first, then, next, finally). - Students review the sentences, using the correct verb tense form. Answer: watched – bought – cut – used – - Some students read their complete decided, was – made, was, wasn’t – helped, sentences aloud. fitted.

(144) - T corrects 4- Consolidation Remind ss of the simple past tense 5-Homework - Practice saying the sentences containing past forms of regular and irregular verbs. a. I watched my brother ride a bicycle b. I decided to learn how to ride a bicycle. - Prepare LANGUAGE FOCUS 3. Week:2 (21) Period: 60. UNIT 9: AT HOME AND AWAY LANGUAGE FOCUS 3. I.Objectives Knowledge : - Reviewing the past form of the verbs Skills : Developing reading and writing skill. Educational : Not available . II. Language contents * Grammar: Reviewing: - How much + is/are + S? - Past simple tense. - Prepositions of places - Present simple tense. - More, less, fewer * Vocabulary: - Reviewing the old words III. Techniques - Role – play - Questions – answers IV. Teaching aids - Flash cards, chart. V. Procedures 1- Greeting and taking the attendance 2-Review of the previous lesson: * Using the pictures: 1. Who went to the aquarium? 2. What did they see there? 3. What did he buy for his daughter? 4. What did they eat for lunch? * Give the correct verb tense in brackets: 1. How much (be) this/ that? (is).

(145) 2. He (buy) this hat yesterday. (bought) 3. Where you (go) five days ago? (did…go ) 3. New lesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content 1. How much is it? - T explains the requirement. a) Work with a partner. Read the dialogue. Lan: How much is the green dress? - Ss practice the dialogue in pairs. Assistant: It’s 30, 000 dong. Lan: And what about the violet dress? Assistant: It’s 35, 000 dong. b) Now make similar dialogues. - Ss make similar dialogues by 2. Prepositions themselves. a) Look at the map. Write the location of each store. - T explains the requirement. - The shoe store is on Hai Ba Trung Street. - T reminds ss of the prepositions of It’s next to/ near the clothing store to the left. places. - The bookstore is on Hue Street. It’s - T calls some ss to write the sentences between the restaurant and the minimart. on the board. - The restaurant is on Hue Street. It’s next to/ - T corrects. beside the bookstore to the left. - The minimart is on Hue Street. It’s next to/ beside the bookstore to the right. - The hairdresser’s is on Tay Ho Street. It’s in the park on the right. - The library is on Tay Ho Street. It’s opposite the hairdresser’s. b) Look at the table. Ask and answer questions with a partner. Ex: A: How far is it from the shoe store to the minimart? B: It’s 500 meters 3. Past simple tense. a) Write the past form of the verbs in the table. - T explains the requirement. VERB PAST FORM - T asks ss to read the example. buy bought - Ss practice in pairs. help helped - T corrects. remember remembered take took send sent - T explains the requirement. think thought - T sticks the table of the verbs on the talk talked board. b) Complete the sentences. Use the words in - T calls ss to complete it..

(146) - T corrects.. the box. - I played volleyball last week. - Yesterday, I talked to my grandmother. - Last December, Mom bought me a new bike. - Dad worked in Hue a few years ago. - I sent a letter to my pen pal last month. - T explains the requirement. 4. Simple tenses - T calls ss to complete the sentences. Look at Nga’s diary and complete the (read or write on the board) dialogue. - T corrects. Nga: Everyday I clean my room, help my Mom and study English. Minh: What did you do yesterday? Nga: I cleaned my room, helped my Mom, studied English, watched TV, played - T explains the requirement. volleyball, and stayed at Hoa’s house. - T asks ss to practice the dialogue in Minh: How about tomorrow? pairs. Nga: I will study English, clean my room, - T corrects students’ mistakes in help my Mom, see a movie, visit my pronunciation. grandmother and buy new shoes. - T gives the missing words. 5. more, less and fewer Write new sentences - T explains the requirement and the use of those words. - Ss work in groups of two. - T calls some ss to write the sentences on the board. Before there were 4 bananas. Now there are fewer bananas. Before there were 500ml of orange juice. Now there is more orange juice. Before there were 200 grams of butter. Now there is more butter. Before there were no cabbages. Now there is one cabbage. Before there was a lot of milk. Now there is less milk. Before there were 2 tomatoes. Now there are more tomatoes. Before there were 2 onions. Now there aren’t any onions. Before there were no chickens. Now there is one chicken. Before there were 2 eggs/ not many eggs. Now there are more/ a lot of eggs. Before there was a lot of meat. Now there is less meat. 4- Consolidation: Remind ss grammar above. 5- Homework Prepare Unit 10 – A1 Week 21.

(147) Singnature:. Nguyễn Văn Đấu. Week:3 (22) Period: 61. UNIT 10: HEALTH AND HYGIENE A. Personal hygiene (1). I. Objectives 1. Knowledge: Students know how to talk about personal hygiene. 2. Skills: reading and writing skill. 3. Education: Students know how to keep the health and hygiene. II. Language contents 1. Grammar: - Present simple tense (review) - Past simple tense (review) - Frequency (review) 2. Vocabulary: - harvest (n) - iron (v) III. Techniques - Questions – answers - Brainstorming. IV. Teaching aids - Pictures: (Hoa’s picture) V. Procedures 1- Greeting and taking the attendance 2- Review of the previous lesson: No checking 3-New lesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities. Content 1. Read. Then answer the questions. - T: What do you know about Hoa? (Who Warm – up is she? Where do her parents live? What is * Brainstorming.

(148) their job?) using picture - Some students talk in front of the class. T: Now we read a letter from Hoa’s mother. -T reads the letter. -Ss listen to the teacher; find it there are any new words. Pre-reading -T explains new words -Harvest (v) (n): mùa gặt/ vụ thu hoạch Harvest time -Iron (v) - yourself:reflexive pronoun:[đại từ phản thân] -write – wrote(v) (- Teacher can use picture (p33) to help While reading students understand the main content of the letter). Take morning exercises - Students do as directed, then read the Take care of oneself letter. Don’t eat too much candy or stay up late - T asks ss to read the questions from a) to …. e) and answer them. - T asks ss to compare their answers in pairs. - T calls some ss to ask and answer the questions before class. - Students ask and answer the questions Post reading before class. - Teacher corrects gives right answers. Answer: Answer questions on page 100 a. They are busy because it’s almost harvest time. b. Hoa’s grandfather helps them on the farm c. They will go to Ha Noi soon, after the harvest. d. Now Hoa is different. She gets up early and does morning exercises every day. e. Her mother wants her to: do her own washing and ironing. She doesn’t want Hoa to: eat too much candy. stay up late. Further. - students talk what they do to take care of.

(149) them, then present in front of the class. 4- Consolidation Review the content of the letter (Students review with the help of the teacher). 5- Homework - Do A1, A2 on page 61 (work book). - Do the talk “what should we do to take care of ourselves” in oral and writing. -Write what you do every day. - Prepare A2,3.. Week:3 (22) Period: 62. UNIT 10: HEALTH AND HYGIENE A. Personal hygiene (2,3). I. Objectives 1. Knowledge: Students know how to talk about daily activities. 2. Skills: listening and writing. 3. Education: Students should do exercises everyday. II. Language contents 1. Grammar: - Reviewing the present simple tense 2. Vocabulary: - Polish (v) III. Techniques - Role – play - Brainstorming - Gap filling IV. Teaching aids - Some pictures relate to someone’s daily activities. V. Procedures 1-Greeting and taking the attendance 2- Review of the previous lesson: - Review the old lesson: talk about what he/she does to take care of herself/ himself. 3- New lesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content 2.Listen Listen and put the pictures in the order you hear. *Warm up Ask some students interview their classmates “What they do every day” Then talk it to the rest of the class *Pre- listening.

(150) T: In the part A2 we listen what Hoa did yesterday. Look at the pictures on page 100. Now tell me what she did. S: do as directed, teacher explains new word Teacher gives tasks: listen and put the pictures in order they hear. Teacher plays the tape three times 1st time : just listen 2nd time: listen and put pictures on order. 3rd time: listen and check Student compares their result in pairs. Some student say their result Teacher corrects a) ; e) ; f) ; d) ; g) ; c) ; h) ; b) ?What did we listen about Hoa in A2 Students remember the listening and answer.. polish (v)(using picture): clean Polish (v). *While – listening. *Post – listening. 3. Read Nam’s diary. Now we read Nam’s dairy with detail in time. * Read the text, and then answer the following sentences. 1. What time does Nam get up/eat breakfast/ do homework. 2. What does he have for breakfast? 3. What did they go after breakfast? 4. What time does Nam go home? Write about yourself. Complete a diary entry like Nam’s. Then practice Teacher gives students tasks: read and write with your partner. Ask these about themselves, them practice ask and questions. answer in pair. What do you do every day? Teacher and students practice as a model. What time do you get up/ eat breakfast/ * Write their dairy and practice ask and do homework/ go to bed…? answer in pairs (using information they write in their diary). * Some pairs practice in front of the class.. 4- Consolidation Teacher reminds ss what Hoa did 5- Homework.

(151) Students prepare section A3, A4 unit 10 (work book) - Do a talk “what I did yesterday with detail in time” - Prepare to write a letter to your friend (live in the country) and you live in the city.. Week:3 (22) Period: 63. UNIT 10: HEALTH AND HYGIENE A. Personal hygiene (4). I. Objectives 1. Knowledge: Reading the letter, aiming at writing a reply. 2. Skills: reading and writing. 3. Education: Not available II. Language contents 1. Grammar: - Review the simple present, simple past 2. Vocabulary: - Strange (n) - don’t worry (exp) - Take care of (exp) - Lay out of a reply letter III. Techniques - Gap filling - Questions and answers IV. Teaching aids - A model letter in Unit 7 (page 73 – English 6) V. Procedures 1- Greeting and taking the attendace 2- Review of the previous lesson: - Review the previous lesson: some student talk what they did yesterday. 3. New lesson Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content *Warm up - T asks: Who send Hoa a letter in A1? What did she write to Hoa? - Ss answer. 4. Write. Complete Hoa’s reply to her - T introdudes the situation mother with suitable verbs. In this period, we read Hoa’s letter in gaps. *Pre- writing - T asks ss to read and fill in gaps.

(152) - Students read and find the appropriate form of *While – writing verbs to fill in gaps. Note: phrases of verbs were learned in the previous lessons. - Students can discuss in groups and write what they fill in the board, compare in groups Teacher correct and gives the key . *Post – writing ( Consolidation) Answer: Was; having; show; take; get; go; wash; iron; eating; told; see; go 4- Consolidation: - Student discusses how to write a letter to their grandmother, and then write in groups. - T asks students to look at the letters in A2 and A4 to give form of them (heading and ending) with some expressions are used. - T asks some ss to read their letters before class. - T corrects 5- Homework - Learn some more regular verbs and irregular verbs remember. - Tell parts of the body. - Prepare B1, 2 Week 22 Singnature:. Nguyễn Văn Đấu.

(153) Week:4 (23) Period: 64. UNIT 10: HEALTH AND HYGIENE B. A BAD TOOTHACHE (1,2). I. Objectives - Helps student how to describe events in a dentist’s - Developing speaking and listening skills. II. Language contents * Grammar: - Present simple (review) * Vocabulary: - Cavity (n) - Toothache (n) - Drill (n) - Appointment (n) - fill (v) - Hurt (v) - feel (v) - Scared (adj) III. Techniques: - Role – play - Questions - Answers IV. Teaching aids: - Pictures of oral hygiene - Tapes V. Procedures : 1-Greeting and taking the attendance 2- Review of the previous lesson: - Review the old lesson. Teacher delivers worksheets, ask students 3-New lesson Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content 1. Listen. Then practice with a partner. *Warm – up.

(154) * Brainstorming: -T says: What did Hoa do to take care of her teeth in her letter in worksheet? S: brushes her teeth before bedtime T: What will happen if we don’t does like Hoa? S: toothache -T: uses gestures to shoe meaning  new word: toothache -T: What should we do if we have a toothache? - S: đi đến nha sĩ -T: What does the dentist do when you come to see him? S: trám răng -T ask: Are you scared to come there? (gesture) - Teacher uses picture to show a cavity in teeth  new word. -T says: In B1 Minh has a toothache. Listen the conversation between Hoa and Minh and answer. 1. What is Minh going do at 10.30? 2. What happen to Hoa last week? 3. How did the dentist help Hoa? -Student listen to the tape twice; Practice in pairs; discuss and find answers to the questions; give answers; give answers before the class. -Teacher corrects -Teacher asks students the dialogue again, discusses in groups to answers the questions. Teacher explains “what’s wrong with Minh?” (It has the same meaning as (what’s the matter?  setting a situation to show meaning). -Students give answers. -Teacher corrects. -T uses the picture on page 104, asks students to look at, guess and answer questions on A2. Toothache(n) Dentist (n) Fill (v) Scare (v) Cavity (n) Drill(n). What’s the matter with …? What’s wrong with …? Answer: a. Minh has a toothache. b. No, he doesn’t. The loudness of the drill scares him. c. Because he has a toothache. d. She filled the cavity in her teeth. e. f. Ss’ answer. 2. Listen and answer.

(155) (some students give their answers in oral) -Teacher asks students to listen twice and note the information needed for the answers, give the table to note. -Students do as directed: listen and take note. - Ss use note to answer Dr Lai’s job:……….. Dr Lai’s clothes……………. How do children feel?....... Dr Lai helps children: explains….. gives….. rd -Students listen to 3 time to check their tells…… answers. reminds to clean……..eat…. -Students discuss in pairs, and then some students give their answers in front of the Answer: class. a. Dr Lai is a dentist. -Teacher corrects. Let ss listen to the tape b. She wears a uniform to work. again and check. c. Most children feel scared when they come to see Dr Lai. d. She explains what will happen. She gives them advice. She tells them how to look after their teeth and she reminds them to clean their teeth regularly and eat sensibly. 4-Consolidation Teacher gives question to consolidate 1. What should we say to ask someone’s status of health? 2. Where should we go if we have a toothache? 3. How can the dentist do to fix our teeth? 5-Homework - Learn vocabulary and expressions. - Let’s think “what does the dentist advice after fixing your teeth?” - Prepare B3,4 + KT 15’ ………………………………………………………………………………… Week:4 (23) Period: 65. UNIT 10: HEALTH AND HYGIENE B. A BAD TOOTHACHE (3,4) + 15- MINS TEST. I. Objectives - Developing skills of speaking, listening and reading to catch the content. II. Language contents * Grammar:.

(156) - Simple future - Simple present tense. * Vocabulary: - Surgery (n) - forget (v) III. Techniques - Questions - Answers - Filling gaps. IV. Teaching aids - Cassettes recorder + tape - Worksheet - Pictures V. Procedures 1. Greeting and taking the attendance 2. Review of the previous lesson: No checking THE FOURTH TEST Time: 15 minutes I/.Use the simple past tense of the verbs in the box: (7ms) 1.I ……………….TV last night. ( watch) 2. Linh ……. ……… a skirt yesterday. (not, make) 3. My mother …………………this shirt 10 years ago. (buy) 4. Mr. Wilson …………….an English teacher 5 years ago. (be) 5. Hong ……………her friends yesterday. ( not, meet) 6. They ……………..to Ho Chi Minh City a week ago. (go) 7. Nam ………………his grandparents last summer vacation. ( visit) II/. Match (3ms ) 1. Go a. talked 2. Play b. was / were 3. Be c. took 4. Make d. played 5. Take e. made 6. talk f. went ANSWER KEY I/. 1,0 mark for each right answer 1. watched 2. didn’t make 3. bought 4. was 5. didn’t meet 6. went 7. visited II/. 0.5 mark for each right answer 1. f 2. d 3. b 4.e 5. c 6. a 3-New lesson Teacher’s and Ss’ activities. Content 3. Listen and read.

(157) -Teacher uses the picture on page 104 to introduce the situation. -T asks to talk about what they know about Minh (elicits: What’s the matter with Minh? How does he feel before going to see dentist? What is the dentist doing?) -Students talks -Teacher gives students a talk: listen and read to catch the main content of the passage. -Teacher asks to find if they are any new word: preteach new word: surgery (say in 1st Lang); forget (using a situation) -Students do as directed, read silently, read him summary and fill in blanks with the appropriate words. Teacher lets some students read their completed text in front of the class. Teacher corrects if there are any in corrections and gives the key. Teacher uses some questions to consolidate how students can understand the lesson. 1. What did Dr. Lai do to calm Minh? (She smiled and said: “Don’t worry Minh”) 2. How is the cavity in her teeth? 3. What did Dr. Lai to do fix to? - T explains the situation -Teacher introduces structure of asking and answering about cause: using a situation: look at Minh: his tooth hurts. Do you want to know the cause of his toothache? You can ask “why” and answers with “because” - T says: Minh’s tooth hurts. Why? (Because he has a cavity) -Students observe the remaining pictures and prepare the dialogue in pairs. -Students practice in pairs with partners, alternating the roles -Some pairs practice in front of the class. -Teacher corrects. *Warm up:. Surgery(n) Forget(v). Now complete the story.. Answer: pleased.. Nervous;. smiles;. cavity;. brush;. 4. Ask and answer questions with a partner. Use the words to help you. Example a) Minh’s tooth hurts. Why? Because he has a cavity..

(158) 4- Consolidation Remind ss what Dr Lai advice Minh 5- Homework - Describe what happened to you when you go to see a dentist in oral and in writing - Do homework in your workbook - Prepare Unit 11(A1) Week:4 (23) Period: 66. UNIT 11: KEEP FIT, STAY HEALTHY A. A CHECK UP (1). I. Objectives - How to ask and answer some information of health . - Presenting listening skill. II. Language contents: * Grammar: - Review: would you + V …? - The simple past tense (To be – regular and irregular verbs) * Vocabulary: (Adj) normal (v) to fill – in, to measure, to weigh, to lease, to tell (n) check – up, medical check – up, medical record, temperature, height, weight, scale (s) III. Techniques - Questions - Answers - Role play - Brainstorming IV. Teaching aids - Cassette recorder + tape - Real objects - Flashcard - Picture (in Unit 10), picture (Unit 11, page 107) - Picture of a scale (s) V. Procedures 1- Greeting and taking the attendance 2- Review of the previous lesson: No checking 3- New lesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content - T asks: Do you often do exercises *Warm up morning? Why should we do exercises (2’) * Brainstorming: morning? (students answer) -Teacher says: yes, we should do exercises to keep fit and stay healthy (let students repeat and write on the board) ( Use a picture of unit 11 page 107 to 1. Listen. Then practice with a partner. introduce the situation of the dialogue).

(159) - Teacher asks students some questions such as: Who are they? Where are they? What do Practice controlled you think they are doing? - the ss are having (13’) a medical check –up. The ss had to fill in the medical records( real object) - T plays the cassette. - T explains new word: look at “37 0C” and guess the meaning of “take your temperature” *Do the same with the other words - Ss practice the dialogue in pairs. - T corrects ss’ pronunciation - T says: Now number the sentences. Use the information given in the conversation you’ve practiced, you put the following sentences in the right order.(sticks the flashcard on the board). - Pair work (numbering the sentences page 108) - Some pairs perform before class. - Teacher correct the exercises - Let students read loudly the correct number p.108 (pay attention to the ending sound ed). -medical check-up(n): buổi khám sức khỏe -fill – in (gesture) - medical record(n): phiếu khám sức khỏe - take one’s temperature: đo nhiệt độ - height(n) - measure(v) - weigh(v) - > weight(n) -scales(n) * 370C: Thirty – seven degree celsius['selsiəs] (như centigrade) * To make a polite request Would you + V ……, please?. Now answer. Number the sentences.. Answer: a-6 b-8 c-3 d-2 e-5 f-1 g-4 h-7 4- Consolidation Ss read the sentences using these please?”/measure/weigh/take your temperature. 5- Homework Prepare A2. structures/. words:. “Would. Week 23. you…….,.

(160) Singnature:. Week:5(24) Period: 67. UNIT 11: KEEP FIT, STAY HEALTHY A. A CHECK UP (2). I. Objectives 1. Knowledge: - How to ask and answer about the height and weight -How to ask and answer some information about oneself and fill- in the medical record. 2. Skills: listening, speaking, reading and less writing. 3. Education: Not available II. Language contents * Grammar: - How + Adjective + be + S…? - WH Question: Which + Noun …? Where does he …? What is his …? How ……… is he? * Vocabulary: - Full name, Forename, Surname, Male, Female - review some regular and irregular verbs in past tense. III. Techniques - Questions - Answers - Role play - Brainstorming IV. Teaching aids - Cassette recorder - Picture (unit 11 page 108) V. Procedures 1- Greeting and taking the attendance 2- Review of the previous lesson: Check students the past form of the verbs – vocabulary 3- New lesson Teacher’s and Ss’ activities * Questions – answers: - T shows students a picture of doctor with a stethoscope.. Content *Warm up (2’).

(161) - T asks students: Who’s he? What does he have? Does the dentist have? What does the doctor use the stethoscope? ['steθəskoup] ống nghe (để khám bệnh) * Questions – answers: -T shows students a pictures of A2 (page 108) and asks students some questions. - T lets students read the dialogue and predict the missing words for 2’ - T asks students if there are new words, explains them - Students listen to the tape (first time and open their books) - Ss listen the 2nd time and write the missing words. - Ss listen the 3rd time and check again - Students compare their task with the partner beside for 2’ - Students read loudly their task before class (2 students) - Ss listen to the tape and correct answer.. 2. Listen. Then write the missing words. *Presentation (5’). *Practice (15’). Answer: Doctor: …ask…How Doctor: …your…50 Hoa: …shorter….me Doctor: …tall Hoa: …meter…centimeters Doctor: …will…nurse…height Hoa: …think Doctor: No. …form Further (3’). -T uses the real objects in class and making the questions and answers with How + Adj …? - Pair work for 1’ -Students perform before class(3 pairs) 4- Consolidation T gives some cues on the board and asks students to make the questions and answers with How + adj …? + How tall is he? He is … + How tall are you? I am ….. + How high is the wall? +How high are these buildings? + How heavy are you? 5- Homework -Learn vocabulary and remember. -So exercises A3 page 69, 70, 71. -Prepare A3..

(162) Week:5(24) Period: 68. UNIT 11: KEEP FIT, STAY HEALTHY A. A CHECK UP (3). I. Objectives 1. Knowledge: . - How to ask and answer some information about oneself and fill- in the medical record. 2. Skills: listening, speaking, reading and less writing. 3. Education: Not available II. Language contents * Grammar: - WH Question: Which …? Where does he …? What is his …? How ……… is he? * Vocabulary: - Full name - Forename - Surname - Male - Female - review some regular and irregular verbs in past tense. III. Techniques - Questions - Answers - Role play - Brainstorming IV. Teaching aids - Flashcard - Pictures V. Procedures 1- Greeting and taking the attendance 2-Review of the previous lesson: - Review: Game: fill in the missing words 3- New lesson (40’) Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content *Warm up * Brainstorming - T shows students a thing in a box and asks them to guess what it is? -T asks students.

(163) The thing we can write down it. What is it? - When we go to see the doctor. We must have it (A medical record) Today we learn the way to fill in it. * Questions – answers: (picture of unit 11 page 11) => Hoa is standing at the Hong Ha school - T asks students some questions about Hoa in the order to teach them some new words e.g.: My full name is Le Thanh Nguyen What’s her full name? How heavy is he? Or we can say: what is her weight? Etc:… - T asks students fill in the missing information page 109 - Students work in pairs (ask and answer about the missing information and fill in) - Some pairs perform before class - Teacher corrects them - T sticks a medical record on the board - T asks a pair of students to go to the board and play the role.. 3. Ask and answer questions with a partner. *Presentation. *Practice. *Further practice. 4- Consolidation - T asks students the way to ask about the weight. + How heavy is she/ he? + What is her weight? + Which class is she/ he in? + Which school does she/ he go to?. - Asks students the way to pronounce “ed” Regular Irregular Call – called Be-was/were Fill – filled Give – gave Measure – measured Have – had Start – started Keep – kept Stop – stopped Leave – left Weigh – weighed Take – took - Lets students read loudly (twice) individually (2 students) 5-Homework -Learn the vocabulary and remember -Exercises: Group the right columns /t/ /d/ /Id/.

(164) called, filled, measured, visited, started, weighted, asked, stopped, looked, watcher, needed, checked -Prepare B1,3. Week:5(24) Period: 69. ------------------------UNIT 11: KEEP FIT, STAY HEALTHY B. WHAT WAS WRONG WITH YOU? (1,3). I. Objectives 1. Knowledge: - Asking and answering about health problems - Being able to fill in the medical record 2. Skills: listening, speaking, reading and less writing. 3. Education: Not available II. Language contents * Grammar: - The past simple tense (review) - Have + name of illness * Vocabulary: - Words relating to health and illness III. Techniques: - Questions - Answers - Role play - Brainstorming - Pair works IV. Teaching aids: - Cassette recorder + tape - Pictures, realist V. Procedures 1- Greeting and taking the attendance 2- Review of the previous lesson: * Complete the sentences with the given words: “ medical, records, temperature, scales, and measure”. a. Your is 370 b. They filled in their medical ……………….. c. ………………… is an instrument for weighing people or things d. The students are having a ………………….. check up e. Can you ……………….. that door? * Match the questions in A with the answers in B A B a. What is his full name? a. 12 Tran Hung Dao street b. What is his age? b. He goes to Le Quy Don school c. Which school does he go to? c. He is 40 kilos.

(165) d. Which class is he in? e. Where does he live? f. What is his height? g. How heavy is he?. d. He is fourteen e. Nguyen Van Hung f. Class 7A g. 1,50 meters. 3- New lesson: Teachers’ and students’ activities. Content *Warm up. * Brainstorming Now tell me how to felt and what you did when you were sick. - Teacher writes student’s suggestions on the board e.g.:. Feeling + tired + unhappy + sad + worried ……. What you did + see the doctor + stay in bed + take temperature +stay inside at recess + write sick note + take medicine. 1. Listen. Then practice with a partner. *Presentation * Questions – answers: - Teacher introduces Mr. Tan – the teacher and Lan (uses the picture on page 110) “This is Mr. Tan – the teacher and this is Lan. Lan was absent yesterday”. What do you think Mr. Tan is asking Lan? (about her health …) What was wrong with her? (she had a …) - T says: We will listen to a dialog between them. Try to check and compare with the list you gave above while listening and reading the dialog. - Teacher checks students with some *Practice questions: Controlled + Was Lan tired? + Did she go to see the doctor? + Did she take temperature? + Did she stay inside at recess? + Did she write sick note? (N) -Teachers asks students if there are difficult or new words, and explains them if there are any..

(166) (Headache – picture: sick note – readier; what was wrong with you = what was the matter with you. - Students listen and repeat after the tape. (class split in half to play 2 roles) - Pair works (practicing the dialog. Read questions – page 110 and try to answer them) - Some pair perform before the class - Teacher’s correction. - T says: Now, we are going to listen to the number of days lost thought sickness in class 7A last semester. Try to guess the numbers and write down. - Students write downs the days lost they guess. - Students compare and check after the first listening. - Students listen to the tape again and write the days lost for each sickness. - Some students give the answers - Teacher corrects pupil’s answers.. Answer: a. Because she had a bad cold b. She had a headache c. He tells her to stay inside at recess. d. He said Lan had a virus e. The doctor wrote it 3. Listen . Then complete the table. Cold: 10 Flu: 43 Stomachache : 37 Headache: 5 Toothache: 17 Total days lost: 112 Further * Pair work. - Students ask and answer about the days lost of them. e.g.: What were your days lost due to? How many days? 4-Consolidation Teacher reminds ss of: - Simple past tense (review) - Asking about health problem. - What was wrong with you? - Saying illness Have + name of illness 5- Homework - Review all answers on your notebooks - Write 5 or 7 sentences about your sickness - Prepare B4 Singnature:.

(167) Week:6(25) Period: 70. UNIT 11: KEEP FIT, STAY HEALTHY B. WHAT WAS WRONG WITH YOU? (4). I. Objective 1. Knowledge- Talking and describing simply about the names and the symptoms of some common diseases. - Being able to fill in the medical records. 2. Skills:speaking, reading and writing skills. 3. Education: Students should take care of theirself. II. Language contents 1. Grammar: - The past simple tense (review) - Everybody, nobody. - Help do something 2.Vocabulary: - Words relating to diseases and symptoms. III. Techniques - Questions - Answers - Pair works - Retelling IV. Teaching aids - Pictures. V. Procedures 1-Greeting and taking the attendance 2-Review of the previous lesson: * Use the correct from or tense of verbs a. You should …………….. (go) to bed early. b. My farther never ………..(take) medicine. c. Lan …………..(be) very tired when she………..(catch) a bad cold two days ago. d. He…………(not come) to the meeting last week . e. There ……….(be) nobody there when I ………… (arrive) yesterday. * Make questions for the following answers: a. This street is five kilometers long. (How) b. This lake is 5 meters in depth. (What) c. The building is over 100 meters high. (What) d. The blue dress is 120 thousand long. (How) 3- New lesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities. Content.

(168) 4. Read. Then answer the questions *Warm up - Teacher gives some pictures of sickness. Student says the name for each and writes down on the board. (cold, flu, toothache, headache, stomachache …) * Questions – answers: - T elicits the topic and pre-teaching some new words (symptoms, disappear, catch, caught, sneeze) + Did you ever hear about the common cold? + We call this one common cold because millions of people catch it every year.  catch. + When you have it. Do you cough or sneeze like him? (show the picture)  cough, sneeze. + What do you do when you have a cold? (take medicine…) Task 1: Students scan the text and find out some symptoms of the common cold and the way to prevent it.. *Pre-reading. -Catch(v): mắc/nhiễm -Symptom(n): Sneeze(v): hắt hơi Cough(v): ho A running nose A slight fever ['fi:və]: sốt nhẹ -Disappear(v) -Medicine(n) ['medsn; 'medisn] -Prevent(v) - cure(n) [kjuə] sự điều trị; đợt chữa bệnh *While-reading. - Students scan the text and do task one. + Symptoms: A runny nose A slight fever Coughing Sneezing + To prevent: Eat well Exercise Keep fit Stay healthy - Teacher teachers the words “disappear” … Task 2: Read the text again and answer the questions in pairs. - Students compare their answer in pairs. - Some pairs perform before the class. *Post- reading Teacher gives the corrects answers. a. Why do we call the cold “common”?  Because every year, millions of people catch it. b. What are the symptoms of the common cold?.

(169)  They are: a runny nose, a slight fever, coughing and sneezing. c. Is there a cure for the common cold?  No, there isn’t. d. Do cold cures work? What do they do?  No, there medicines don’t cure a cold, but they relieve the symptoms. e. How can you help prevent a cold?  By eating well, doing exercise, keeping fit and staying healthy.. 4-Consolidation Retelling about the common cold as the following suggested diagram: - Students work in pairs - Some students perform before the class. Remember There are some symptoms of a common cold: a runny nose, a slight fever, coughing and sneezing. Nobody knows a cure but some medicines relieve the symptoms. To prevent a cold we should eat well, exercise, keep fit and stay healthy … - Simple present tense (review) - Help do something 5-Homework - Rewrite what they retell about the common cold in student’s exercise notebooks. - To get ready for unit 12, find and write the names of food they know in their notebooks. - Review knowledge from Unit 9 to Unit 11. ……………………………………………………………. Week:6(25) Period: 70* I. Objectives 1. Knowledge. Review students of: Simple past tense Simple present tense. REVISION.

(170) Present continuous tense How much/ How many Prepositions (of places) Exclamatives Structures: How heavy + be+ S? What is ……. weight? How far is it from…to…? How tall + be + S ? Why…? Would you like+ N/ to infinitive? 2. Skills: writing. 3. Education: Study hard. II. Language contents 1. Grammar: review 2. Vocabulary: review III. Techniques - Questions - Answers IV. Teaching aids - Pictures: option V. Procedures 1- Greeting and taking the attendance 2 -Review of the previous lesson: No checking 3- New lesson: A. GRAMMAR I. Simple past tense The past simple tense: describe the actions that happened in the past. * The adverbs to recognize the tense: ago, last (week, month,…), yesterday,… * Structures: +) affirmative: S + V2 /Ved * I/ She/ He + was *We/ You/ They + were +) negative: S + didn’t + V (bare infinitive) +) Interrogative: Did + S + V (bare infinitive)…? Answer: Yes, S + did/ No, S + didn’t III. Structures How heavy + be+ S?/What is …….. weight? How far is it from…to…? How tall + be + S? Why…?. Would you like…? Teacher and Students’ activities T checks attendances. Contents Warmer :.

(171) Ss report T asks sts to think and match to the net Ss list out and match to the net. T checks the results Ss listen and observe. T reviews all the knowledge learnt Ss write down. T gives examples Ss can give some examples T asks sts to give some other sentences Ss read the sentences T reviews the imperative sentences Ss make some sentences Checks form. T gives examples Ss can give some examples. - Brainstorming. Irregular Verbs I. Presentations 1. The simple past tense Form : S + V2/ed + O + A Ex : a. He went to this place ten years ago. b. Nam visited Ha Long Bay last summer. c. They didn’t buy some fish yesterday . d. Did he stop at the drug store . ? 2. Why questions and answer with Because Form : Why +Aux verbs + S +V…? Because S + V + O… Ex :Why does Minh’s tooth hurt ? -Because he has a cavity. 3. The ending of ED - /id/ : t, d Ex :wanted, decided, needed - /t/ : k, f,p, g ss, x, ch, sh,c Ex : looked, missed, washed, mixed - /d/ all of words Ex : lived , played, helped. 4. Imperative sentences a. Verb + O ! Ex : Close the door Let him go b. Don’t + Verb.. ! Ex : Don’t close the door please ! Don’t stay up late please ! 5. Questions words forms : Form : WH- word / Yes /No question ? Ex : How heavy + be+ S?/What is …….. weight? How far is it from…to…? How tall + be + S?.

(172) Why…? Would you like…?. 4-Consolidation Ss do some exercies on workbook by themselves. 5-Homework Ss prepare the english test in 45 minutes.. Week:6(25) Period: 71. THE THIRTH ENGLISH TEST Time: 45 minutes. I. Objectives 1. Knowledge: Checking students’ knowledge from Unit 9 to Unit 11. o Listening: Listen and complete the table. o Reading: Read a passage about how to keep our teeth healthy. Then check the statements if they are True(T) or False(F).  Writing: put the verbs in the right columns according to their final sounds 2. Skills: writing. 3. Education: Study hard II. Matrix Nội dung Nhận biết TN TL I. Language focus II. Reading III. Writing. Choose the best . option A, B C or D Read the passage about Mai , Answer the questions. Put the verbs in the simple tense. Vận dụng cấp Thông hiểu độ thấp TN TL TN TL 6. 6. 3.0. 3.0=30%. 5. 5. 2.5. 2.5=25% 5 2.5. IV.. 5. Tổng số:. 5 2.5=25% 5.

(173) Listening 2.5 5 Tổng số:. 2.5. 11. 5. 5.5. 2.5. 2.5=25% 20 10.00 =100%. III. Questions I. LANGUAGE FOCUS Choose the right word or phrase that best completes the sentence. (2.5m) 1. What is your ………….., Lan? – I’m 45 kilos. a. height b. weight c. tall d. name 2. …………..is this bag? – It’s 80,000 dong. a. How much b. How many c. How old d. How heavy 3. Yesterday, I …………to school because I was sick. a. goes b. didn’t go c. went d. go 4. Did you buy any souvernirs in Nha Trang ? – No, I ………. a. don’t b. won’t c. didn’t d. am not 5. I live ………..…Tran Van Thoi town with my grandmother. a. on b. at c. between d. in 6. ………….…did Lan go to the dentist’s last week? – Because she had a bad toothache. a. When b. Where c.What d. Why II. READING Read the passage carefully and answer the questions: Mai was born in Hai Phong , but now she lives in Ha Noi with her aunt and uncle. She went to Ha Noi two years ago. Now she studies at Quang Trung school. In her new school, she has a lot of friends. Yesterday was her thirteenth birthday. She had a small party with her friends.They ate a lot of food and fruits. In the evening Mai had a stomachache, so her aunt very worried. She took Mai to the hospital. The doctor said that Mai ate too much candy and fruit. Today Mai has to stay at home. Questions (2.0 m) 1. Where was Mai born ? ...................................................................................................................................... 2. Did Mai go to Ha Noi three years ago ? ...................................................................................................................................... 3. Which school does she go to now ? ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 4.What did Mai and her friends eat yesterday ? ................................................................................................................................. .. III. WRITING (2. 5 m) Put the verb in the simple past tense..

(174) 1. My aunt( go)…………to Ca mau last Sunday. 2. It (be) ……….hot. 3. My sister(send) ……………me a letter yesterday afternoon. 4. I(buy)………………a new pen. 5. Mr. Lam(take)………..us to the zoo. IV. LISTENING Listen. Then complete the dialogue. (2.5m) Doctor: I want to ask you a few questions before I start, Hoa. (1) …………… old are you Hoa: Fourteen. Doctor: And your (2) ………………..is one meter 50 centimeters? Hoa: No, I think I’m (3)…………………. The nurse measure me Doctor: Oh. How tall are you? Hoa: One meter (4) …………………..centimeters. Doctor; I will ask the nurse to check your height again. How (5) ……………….are you? Hoa: I think I’m 42 kilos. Doctor: No. It says on your form that you’re 40 kilos. ANSWER KEY: I. LANGUAGE FOCUS Choose the right word or phrase that best completes the sentence. (2.5m) 1. b 2. a 3. c 4. c 5. d 6. d II. READING Questions (2.0 m) 1. Mai was born in Hai Phong. 2. No, she didn’t. 3. Now she studies at Quang Trung school. 4. They ate a lot of food and fruits. III. WRITING (2. 5 m) 1. went 2. was 3. sent 4. bought 5. took IV. LISTENING Listen. Then complete the dialogue. (2.5m) Doctor: I want to ask you a few questions before I start, Hoa. (1) How old are you?.

(175) Hoa: Fourteen. Doctor: And your (2) height is one meter 50 centimeters? Hoa: No, I think I’m (3) shorter. The nurse measure me Doctor: Oh. How tall are you? Hoa: One meter (4) 45 centimeters. Doctor; I will ask the nurse to check your height again. How (5) heavy are you? Hoa: I think I’m 42 kilos. Doctor: No. It says on your form that you’re 40 kilos. Homework Review Unit 9 to Unit 11.. Singnature: week 25 Nguyễn Văn Đấu. Week:7(26) Period: 72. THE ANSWER KEY TO THE THIRD ENGLISH TEST. I. Objectives 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to remember the knowledge from Unit 9 to Unit 11. 2. Skills: writing. 3. Education: Study hard II. Language contents 1. Grammar: review 2. Vocabulary: review III. Teaching methods -Communicative approach, explanation - Pair work, group work, Questions - Answers II. Teaching aids Teaching plan, questions of the test. III. Procedures: 1- Greeting and taking the attendance. 2-Review of the previous lesson: ( No checking) 3- New lesson Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content ANSWER KEY: - T reminds ss of the structures of: I. LANGUAGE FOCUS.

(176) simple present, present continuous and Choose the right word or phrase that best simple past tense. completes the sentence. (3.0m) - T asks ss to redo the test. 1. b 2. a 3. c 4. c 5. d 6. d - T corrects ss’ mistakes.. - T asks ss to read the text and check T II. READING or F. - Ss read the text and check. - T gives the correct answers.. - T reminds ss of how to use the past III. WRITING (2. 5 m) simple tense. 1.went - Ss go to the board and complete the 2. was table. 3.sent - T corrects. 4.bought 5. took - T plays the cassette. - Ss listen and take note - T asks some ss to give the answers. - T corrects.. IV. LISTENING Listen. Then complete the dialogue. (2.5m) 1. Mai was born in Hai Phong. 2. No, she didn’t. 3. Now she studies at Quang Trung school. 4. They ate a lot of food and fruits. Doctor: I want to ask you a few questions before I start, Hoa. (1) How old are you? Hoa: Fourteen. Doctor: And your (2) height is one meter 50 centimeters? Hoa: No, I think I’m (3) shorter. The nurse measure me Doctor: Oh. How tall are you? Hoa: One meter (4) 45 centimeters. Doctor; I will ask the nurse to check your height again. How (5) heavy.are you? Hoa: I think I’m 42 kilos. Doctor: No. It says on your form that.

(177) you’re 40 kilos. 4-Consolidation: Ss correct if necessary. 5- Homework - Prepare Unit 12( A1) Week:7(26) Period: 73. Unit 12 : LET’S EAT A . WHAT SHALL WE EAT?(1). I. Objectives 1. Knowledge:- Talking about different food and expressing preferences. 2. Skills: Speaking, reading and listening skills. 3 Attitude: Students should choose suitable food to eat. II. Language contents 1. Grammar: - I’d like (Review) - Responses with so – too, either - neither 2. Vocabulary: - Words relating to foods. III. Teaching methods - Communicative approach, explanation. - Pair work- group work, individual work: Questions - Answers - Role – pay - Brainstorming IV. Teaching aids - Pictures (enlarged from pictures in the textbook (page 114-115) - Cassettes recorder + tape - Real objects and artificial objects. V. Procedures 1-Greeting and taking the attendance 2- Review of the previous lesson: (no checking). 3- New lesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities. Content 1. Listen and read. Then practice with a partner. *Warm up Brainstorming:. - T asks: “Do you ever go to the market?” What food do you buy or see at the market?” (5’) - Ss: “-Meat, vegetable” - T: What food do you buy or see at the.

(178) market? - Ss: “-chicken, bean, beef” -T explains the requirement and says: We’ll listen to a dialogue between Hoa and her aunt and guess: What food they bought at the market yesterday? - Students prepare to answer the questions while listening and reading the dialogue. - T plays the cassette. - Ss check their guess. - Teach new words by read objects. - Students listen and repeat after the tape. - Practice in pairs. - T corrects ss’ pronunciation. - T introduces new grammar note. *Presentation (5’). Paragraph 1 - meat stall(n) quầy bán thịt - chicken(n) ['t∫ikin] - beef(n) - pork(n) *Grammar note: So + auxiliary verbs + S (affirmative) Neither + auxiliary verbs + S (negative) - Teacher explains the situation and Paragraph 2 teaches new words by read objects. - pea(n) - Students listen and repeat after the tape. - carrot(n) - Practice in pairs. - spinach(n) ['spinidʒ] - T corrects ss’ pronunciation. - ’cucumber(n): quả dưa chuột - T introduces new grammar note *Grammar note: S + verbs/auxiliary , too - Teacher explains the situation and S + V(negative)/ Auxiliary(negative), teaches new words by read objects. either - Students listen and repeat after the tape. Paragraph 3 - Practice in pairs. - papaya (n): [pə'paiə] đu đủ - T corrects ss’ pronunciation. - pineapple(n) ['painæpl] dứa - T introduces new grammar note - smell(v) - durian (n) ['dju:riən]: quả sầu riêng - T asks ss to read the dialogues again and *Grammar note: write the list of food Lan and her aunt Neither + auxiliary + S bought at the market. - Call on a student to read aloud the list of the foods they bought. - t gives the answers. Further - T asks the students to give expressions of Answer: beep spinach cucumbers Hoa’s. oranges - Let’s….

(179) - I’d like…. 4- Consolidation T asks ss to make sentences, using LET’S…and I’D LIKE… 5- Homework - Prepare A2. Week:7(26) Period: 74. Unit 12 : LET’S EAT A. What shall we eat?(2). I. Objectives 1. Knowledge:Talking about hobby using SO, TOO, EITHER and NEITHER 2. Skills: Speaking skill. 3. Attitude: Students should choose suitable food to eat and make them carefully. II. Language contents 1.Grammar: - Responses with so – too, either - neither 2.Vocabulary: - Words relating to foods. III. Teaching methods -Communicative approach, explanations. - Pair work- group work, individual work. - Questions - Answers - Role – pay IV. Teaching aids - Real objects and artificial objects. V. Procedures 1- Greeting and taking the attendance 2- Review of the previous lesson: Ss role –play the dialogues Answer the questions: What did Lan and her aunt buy at the market yesterday? (Beep, spinach, cucumbers, oranges) 3- New lesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content 2. Ask and answer questions with a partner. Talk about the food you like. - T explains the requirement - T reminds ss of: SO, TOO, EITHER and NEITHER.

(180) - T asks students model questions. - Ss read the answers - T asks ss to practice in groups of two, using the structures with SO, TOO, EITHER and NEITHER. - Ss practice in groups of two, using the structures with SO, TOO, EITHER and NEITHER. - T calls some pairs to perform before Further class. - Ss work in pairs. - T corrects - T asks ss to practice more using the structures with SO, TOO, EITHER and NEITHER. (free) 4-Consolidation T reminds ss of the structures with SO, TOO, EITHER and NEITHER 5- Homework -Prepare A3,4 Week 26 Singnature:. Nguyễn Văn Đấu. Week:8(27) Period: 75 UNIT 12: LET’S EAT A. WHAT SHALL WE EAT? (3,4). I. Objectives 1.Knowledge: Asking about what students ate and drank yesterday. 2. Skills: writing 3. Attitude: Students can use past simple tense with irregular verbs..

(181) II. Language contents 1. Grammar: - Simple past tense (Review) 2. Vocabulary: Slice(v), green pepper(n), onion(n), boil(v), add(v), heat(v), salt(n), taste(v), pan(n), stir-fry(v), soy sauce(n), chopstick(n), spoon(n), III. Teaching methods Communicative approach - Eliting, Pair work- group work, Questions - Answers IV. Teaching aids - Pictures – cassette player, tape. V. Procedures 1- Greeting and taking the attendance 2- Review of the previous lesson: Students practice, using SO, TOO, EITHER and NEITHER Teacher writes these sentences on the board: I like oranges. Minh got a good mark yesterday. Linh has many books 3- New lesson Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content Chain games; T gives a chain games I like bananas Ss play games. I like bananas, apples. - T asks ss to look at the pictures on page 3. Read. Then answer the questions. 116 and guess the content of the text. - T introduces the situation. - T asks ss some questions before doing the task. Hoa’s aunt cooked dinner that evening. Read and find out the answers to the questions: “What did she cook? How did she prepare the food? What did Hoa do? - T asks ss to read the text silently to answer those questions. - Ss read the text silently to answer those questions. - T calls some ss to answer the questions. - T asks ss to read the text. - T explains new words - slice(v) - green pepper(n).

(182) - onion(n) -boil(v) -add(v) -heat(v) -salt(n) -taste(v) [teist] -pan(n) -stir-fry(v) - T asks ss to read the question (part a)) - soy sauce(n) and answer it. -chopstick(n) - Ss read the question. -spoon(n) - T calls student to write the menu on the board. - Student writes the menu on the board. - T asks ss to complete the instructions. Answer: - T asks ss to match the instructions to the a)Menu pictures(page 117) -Cucumber salad with onions - T calls ss to check the answers. -Boiled spinach - T corrects. -Stir-fried beef peppers and onions -Rice b)+Add the missing verbs: 1. Slice 2. Slice 3. Heat 4. Stir-fry 5. Add 6. Boil 7. Add +Matching the instructions to the pictures: 1. c 2. f 3.a 4. d 5. b 6. e 7. g - T explains the requirement 4. Write. What did you eat and drink - T asks ss to write what they ate and yesterday? (consolidation) drank yesterday - Ss to write what they ate and drank yesterday - T asks ss to compare the answer with their partner. - Ss compare the answer with their partner. - T calls one or two student(s) to read (or write) the sentences. - T corrects. 4-Consolidation: - Ask Ss to write their own menu about things they ate yesterday. Menu 1. Breakfast : milk, bread .... 2. Lunch. : .....

(183) - Ask Ss to write at home Eg: Yesterday for breakfast I drank milk, ate bread ... For breakfast I ate ... For lunch I ate ... 5- Homework -Prepare B1. - Finish their own menu. - Learn new words in by heart.. Week:8(27) Period: 76. UNIT 12: LET’S EAT B. OUR FOOD (1). I. Objectives 1. Knowledge:- Talking about the habit of keeping healthy. -Student can choose healthy drinks and food 2. Skills: listening skill. 3. Attitude: Students know how to choose healthy drinks and food. II. Language contents 1. Grammar: + Simple past tense + Conjunction: but + Make 2. Vocabulary: dirt (n) III. Teaching methods Communicative approach Pair work- group work, Role-play, Questions-answer. IV. Teaching aids Cassette, pictures, tape. V. Procedures.

(184) 1- Greeting and taking the attendance 2 - Review of the previous lesson: Students read the text on page 116 Write new words: Slice(v), green pepper(n), onion(n), boil(v), add(v), heat(v), salt(n), taste(v), pan(n), stir-fry(v), soy sauce(n), chopstick(n), spoon(n), 3-. New lesson Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content Warm up: Chatting: T asks Ss answer. - T asks ss to look at the picture and explain it. - Ss look at the picture and explain it. - T asks: where is Ba? Can you guess what’s wrong with him? - T plays the cassette. - T asks ss to answer the questions above. - T plays the cassette again (repeat if necessary) - T explains new word - T asks ss to perform the dialogue. - ss perform the dialogue. - T asks ss to read the dialogue silently and then summary it. - Ss read the dialogue silently and then summary it. - T asks ss to compare the answer with a partner. - T calls one or two student(s) to read the complete story. - T corrects. Did you have stomachache? Do you know what was wrong with you?. 1. Listen. Then practice with a partner. -dirt(n). Answer: 1.doctor 2.sick 3.asked 4.had 5.spinach 6.wash 7.more carefully 8.Vegetables 9.make 10.She 11.medicine. 4-Consolidation Remind ss of the content of the dialogue – link to the fact 5- Homework Prepare B 2,4.

(185) ……………………………………………………………………………………… Week:8(27) Period: 77. UNIT 12: LET’S EAT B. OUR FOOD (2,4). I. Objectives 1. Knowledge:- Talking about diet - Name of some healthful foods and drinks. - Students grapes the affirmative and negative form of simple past tense and conjunction “but”. 2. Skills: listening, reading and writing 3. Attitude: Students know how to eat diet II. Language contents 1. Grammar: - Must, should (Review) - Command (Review) - The affirmative and negative form of simple past tense 2.Vocabulary: Balanced (adj) Moderate (adj) Diet (n) Body – building foods Energy – giving foods Protective foods. III. Teaching methods Communicative approach Pair work- group work- individual work. - Questions - Answers - Story – telling - Role play IV. Teaching aids - Cassette recorder , tape - Pictures V. Procedures 1-Greeting and taking the attendance 2- Review of the previous lesson: No checking 3- New lesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities. Content *Warm – up - T asks students some questions about the What kinds of foods do they like? kind of foods they would like to eat.

(186) Ex: 2.Listen and read. Then answer the What food would you like to eat? questions. Do you like vegetables? *Pre-reading I like fish. And you? - Eliciting the topic and teaching new words *While-reading -balance diet(n) -unhealthy food -moderate (a) vừa phải -amount(n) số/ khối lượng -body- building food(n) thức ăn giúp phát triển cơ bắp -energy (n) - T has students listen to the tape once or -fatty food(n): thức ăn giàu chất béo twice. -dairy products: sản phẩm bơ sũa -T has students read the passage to -cereal(n): ngũ cốc themselves. -Lifestyle(n) lối sống -T calls on one or two students to read the Answer: passage aloud to the class. -T has students read over questions a) - c) -T asks student to find the answers to the questions. -T has students compare their answers with their partners. -T calls on some students to give the answers in front of the class. * Make any necessary corrections -T has students study the pictures for a few minutes and answers the questions. What’s this? Are they vegetables? -T has students listen to the tape twice. -T has students listen to the tape again and write the letters or Lan, Nga, Ba and Hoa ate and drank. -Teacher plays the tape (the 2nd time books opened) - T calls ss to give the answers. - T corrects. TAPE TRANSCRIPTION. 4. Listen and write the letters of what they ate and drank. Answer: Lan: f,b,d,g Nga: a,d,g. Ba: c,a,e,h Hoa: b,e,g.

(187) For her lunch, Lan had beef with noodles and vegetables. She had juice too. Ba chose fish and rice and some fruit. He drank some water. Nga ate rice and vegetables and drank juice. He had noodles and some fruit. She had juice, too. 4- Consolidation Remind ss of a balance diet and the benefit of eating sugar. 5- Homework Prepare Language focus 4. Do exercise 4 – page 79 English exercise book. Singnature: 28/02/2012. Nguyễn Văn Đấu. ]. Week:9(28) Period: 78. LANGUGE FOCUS 4.

(188) I. Objectives 1.Knowledge:Revision helps the students to consolidate what they have learnt from Unit 10 to unit 12 2. Skills: listening, speaking, reading and writing. 3. Attitude: Study hard II. Language contents 1. Grammar: a. Past simple tense b. Indefinite quantifiers. c. Too and either d. So and neither e. Imperatives III. Teaching methods Communicative approach Techniques: Questions – Answers, gap filling, role play, guessing information. IV. Teaching aids - Pictures, colored chalks. V. Procedures 1-Greeting and taking the attendance 2- Review of the previous lesson: Teacher asks Ss to talk about their food. 3-New lesson Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content *Warm up Teacher guides Ss to review the grammar notes from Units 10, 11, 12. T: Review simple past tense 1. Past simple tense a- Affirmative form: I went to Dam Sen Park last Sunday She watched TV yesterday evening. b- Negative form: I didn’t go to Dam Sen Park last Sunday. She didn’t watch TV yesterday evening. c- Interrogative form: Did she watch TV yesterday evening?. - T has Ss look at the pictures in the textbook, guess the actions and then answer the questions in pairs. - T asks some pairs to practice in front of the class and correct and them.. Answer: b. No, I didn’t. I had dinner in a restaurant. c. No, I didn’t. I went to the movie theater yesterday..

(189) d. No, I didn’t. I read a book on the weekend. e. No, I didn’t. I played football yesterday. 2. Indefinite quantifiers - T reviews some indefinite quantifiers. - T asks Ss to look at the pictures on page a) Write the correct expression 124 to write the correct expression and B. a lot of tea C. a little sugar correct them. D. a lot of salt E. too much coffee - T asks Ss to look at the pictures on page b) Complete the dialogues 125 to complete the dialogues. A. A little…a lot - T asks some pairs to read the dialogues …a little… and correct them. B. a lot of C. too much D. a little 3. Too and either a) Work with a partner. Read the - T reviews TOO and EITHER dialogues - T asks Ss to work in pairs to read the Students’ practice dialogues. - T has Ss look at the pictures on page 126 b) Look at the pictures. Make up similar to make up similar dialogues with a dialogues with a partner. partner. Students’ practice - T gives some feedback. 4. So and neither Students’ practice - T reviews SO and EITHER - T asks Ss to work in pairs to read the dialogues. - T has Ss look at the pictures on page 126 again to make up 8 dialogues with a 5. Imparatives partner. Complete the instructions - T gives some feedback. - T reviews imperatives. - T asks Ss to look at the pictures on page Answer: 128 and complete the instructions. b. Wash c. Slice d. Mix e. Add - T asks some Ss to read the instructions f. Stir g. Wait and correct them. 4- Consolidation - T: Have Ss give some regular verbs and make some sentences using them. - T: Have Ss to write the structures of TOO, EITHER, SO and NEITHER. 5- Homework.

(190) Prepare Unit 13 A1. Week:9(28) Period: 79. Unit 13: ACTIVITIES A. SPORTS (1). I. Objectives 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to describe sporting activities and pastimes. T introduces the topic & gives practice in listening & reading, asking & answering questions about sports 2.Skills : listening, speaking, reading & writing 3. Attitude : students should do exercise II. Language contents 1. Vocabulary: words relating to sports 2. Grammar : simple past & simple present III. Teaching methods Communicative approach Eliciting, questions & answers, pair/ group work. IV. Teaching aids: cassette, pictures & sub- boards. V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and taking the attendance 2- Review of the previous lesson: No checking 3- New lesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content * Warm up: chatting (5’) * Warm up: chatting - T asks ss some questions + What are your favorite sports? - Sts give feedback + When do you always play these sports ? - Lead into the new lesson + Which sports do you like best ? + Make a list of the sports which you play in your free time. A1/ ( 30') A1/ Listen and read. Then answer the * T asks ss: questions - T calls on some ss to identify the * Vocabulary: sports in the pictures - roller-skating(n) trượt patanh( sd giầy có + Who can play one of the sports in bánh xe ở 4 góc) the picture? - roller-blading (n) trượt patanh (giấy có bành.

(191) - T introduces the content of the text, sets the task * T has ss listen to the tape twice. - Ss read the passage to themselves to find the answers - Ss name the sports in the lesson, using the pictures - T corrects some errors + Do you play any of the ten sports that are popular in the USA? - Ss ask and answer the question in pairs - public pairs & corrections. xe nằm dọc dưới đế giầy. - American football(n) bóng bầu dục - baseball (n) bóng chày - skateboarding(n) trượt ván - basket ball(n) bóng rổ * Sentence: - Which sport do you like best ? - What sports do you like ?. Questions: * T asks ss a,b: Students’ answer + Which sports are the most popular (a/ Yes, I do./ No, I don't. My favorite sport is in Vietnam? table tennis / I like badminton best. + Is baseball your favorite sports? b/ Yes, I do./ No, I don't.) If not, what is your first choice? + Do you like table tennis? - Ss discuss it in pairs - public pairs & corrections 4- Consolidation (8’) * True or False ? 1/ Teenagers in the USA like baseball best. 2/ Baseball is the most popular game in the world. 3/ Many teenagers don't like table tennis. * 1 T, 2 F, 3 F +T reminds ss of the notes above and gives the homework. 5- Homework: ( 2' ) -Learn the remember by heart. - Write A2 at home -Prepare A3. Week:9(28) Period: 80 Unit 13 ( cont. ) A. SPORTS (3).

(192) I. Objectives : 1. Knowledge:T gives practice in using adjectives & adverbs & in reading for comprehension about sports 2.Skills: listening, speaking, reading & writing 3. Attitude: hard-working II. Language contents: 1 .Vocabulary: words relating to sports 2. Grammar : adjectives & adverbs III. Teaching methods: Communicative approach Eliciting, questions & answers, pair/ group work. IV. Teaching aids: cassette, pictures & sub- boards. V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and taking the attendance 2- Review of the previous lesson: Students read the text - Answer the questions: What kind of sport do many American teenagers like? (they like table tennis) -Write new words: skateboarding, roller-skating, basketball, baseball 3- New lesson Teacher’s and Ss’ activities * Warm up: (5’) - T sets the task - Ss : tell some most popular sports -Ss: say -T: lead in. Content. * Warm up: some most popular sports soccer football tennis badminton A3/ (35') A3/ Listen. Then practice with a * T : elicit the target language partner -Ss: look at the picture, name the 1/ Vocabulary: sports. player(n) cầu thủ -Ss: read the sentences silently swimmer(n) vận động viên bơi lội - Ss listen to the sentences twice & runner(n) vận động viên chạy đua highlight the key words ( e.g. good cyclist (n) người đi xe đạp player, plays well ) 2/ Remember: _T: pre-teach some vocabulary Adj - Adv * Ss work in pairs, using the pictures * good - well + St1: good - skillful - skillfully +St2: He's a good player. - slow - slowly +St1: well - bad - badly +St2: He plays football well. - quick - quickly * public pairs & corrections - safe – safely Ad+ ly =Adv of manner.

(193) * A good player - play well 4-Consolidation - T reminds ss of the notes above 5-Homework -Learn your lesson. - Do A1 - A4 / 82, 83 - workbook - Prepare Unit 13(A4,5) …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………. Singnature: Week 28. Week:10(29) Period: 81. Unit 13 (cont) A. SPORTS (4,5). I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to describe sporting activities and pastimes. T gives practice in forming adverbs and pronunciation and intonation. 2.Skills : reading comprehension & speaking 3.Education: keep healthy II . Language contents: 1.Vocabulary: words relating to sports 2. Grammar: adjectives & adverbs of manner III. Teaching methods: Communicative approach Eliciting, questions & answers, pair/ group work. IV. Teaching aids: pictures & sub- boards. V .Procedures: 1- Greeting and taking the attendance.

(194) 2- Review of the previous lesson: Ss read the sentences and write new words: skillful (A3) 3- New lesson Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content (2-5’) - T asks ss some questions: + What is your favorite sport? + What kind of sport do you usually play in your free time? - T introduce new lesson A4/ Read. Then answer the questions A4/ ( 20') * Vocabulary: * T shows the pictures - competition + What are they doing? + Do you always take a walk ? + Who often take a walk in your family? + What are the advantages of walking? + What sports activity does the writer take part in ? + What is WFF ? - Ss read the passage to themselves, find the answers - public answers & corrections * Answers: - T asks ss some more questions, a/ He takes part in Walking For Fun club / explains some words walking. - Translate the text into Vietnam b/ The writer's school team won the first (option) prize, they were so happy and wanted to keep the activities. c/ One activity is a 5 km walk / walking 5 km to the beach on Sunday morning, and the other is walk- to- school day. d/ It's 5 km from school to the beach. e/ Wednesday is the WTS day f/ Members living near school often take part in the WTS day. * Real situations + What sport is it in the picture? A5/ Write. Change the adjectives in ( swimming) brackets to adverbs (20’) + Do you like swimming? ( yes/ No ) + Where can we go swimming? -T: lead in -T: check ss’ memories + You're going to read a passage about safety awareness in the swimming pool or on the beach. You read and find the.

(195) main idea of the passage * Ss read the text & find what the main idea of the reading is - T gives ss the new vocabulary in the lesson - T reviews Adverbs of manner (Am - T sets the task + read again and change the adjectives in brackets to adverbs - Ss read the text & do the exercise - cross check - public answers & corrections. - T gives the correct keys - T asks + What do you think about the position of the adverbs you have done ?( V + Am / Am + V ) - Ss read the complete passage aloud - translate some sentences into Vietnamese * T asks ss some questions + Do you know the places where we can swim? -T: educate ss - Ss work in groups of 6 to tell about water safety awareness - public groups & corrections. * Vocabulary: + awareness (n) ý thức be aware of : ý thức về + aim(n) mục tiêu + l lifeguard(n) người cứu hộ +pool edge (n) thành hồ + obey(v) tuân theo, vâng lời - careless (a)không cần thận * Key - clear - clearly - careful - carefully - safe - safely - careless - carelessly - strict - strictly. 4-Consolidation: ( 2') - T reminds ss of the the adverbs of manner 5- Homework: - Prepare B1,2. Week:10(29) Period: 82. Unit 13 ACTIVITIES ( cont ) B. COME AND PLAY (1,2).

(196) I. Objectives 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to make an invitation & refuse/ accept to an invitation. 2.Skills : listening, speaking, reading & writing 3.Education: be polite II. Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: about sports 2. Grammar : modal verbs: can, must, should, ought to III. Teaching methods: Communicative approach Eliciting, questions & answers, pair/ group work. IV. Teaching aids: cassette, pictures & sub- boards. V.Procedures: 1- Greeting and taking the attendance 2- Review of the previous lesson: Ss read the text and write new words: obey, aim, edge, lifeguard 3- New lesson Teacherand Ss’activities Content * Warm up: - T sets the task * Warm up: - Ss: work in groups and play “ Find Find s.o who…. Name s.o who…” - Can play soccer well -Ss: go to the board and read their - Can run quickly result aloud - Can play volleyball skillfully - T: feed back - Can’t swim -T: lead in - Can’t play table tennis well. B1/ * T lets ss look at the pictures & asks ss what Ba & Nam are doing ( They are playing table tennis) - T introduces the content of the dialogue * Ss listen to the dialogue twice, following the dialogue - Ss practice the dialogue in pairs, changing roles - public pairs & corrections - Ss read through the dialogue to find the answers (a) - What does Ba have to do for tomorrow work? - T explains the modal verbs ( can,. B1/ Listen. Then practice with a partner: - modal verbs: should, ought to, must - paddle (n): vợt bóng bàn - It takes s.o time to do s.th: mất bao nhiêu thời gian để làm gì * Answers: a/ Nam must / should finish his homework before he plays table tennis. b/ Nam will be ready in a few minutes. c/ Ba will finish a question for Math. d/ Ba has two paddles. MODALS: must, have to, ought to, should, can, may…. -should / ought to → give advice -Have to / must → give an obligation.

(197) must, should, ought to, have to ) - Ss find the answers b, c, d in pairs * public pairs & corrections - writing as homework. -Can/ may → show an ability * Would you like to…. - I’d love to, but I can. B2/ Listen. Then practice with a partner. Change the underlined details using the B2/ ( 15') information in the box * Come and play basket ball - I'm sorry. I don't think I can. * Ss listen to the model dialogue twice - I should clean my room. - T explains the task * Would you like to play table tennis? - T makes a model (a) : T - st , st - st - I'd like to, but I can't. * pair- work & changing roles a/ A: Come and play volleyball, B ? - public pairs & corrections B: Well, I should visit my grandmother. A: Can you play on the weekend? ....... A: See you on Saturday afternoon. * Now make your own dialogues - I must practice my music lesson - I ought to help my Mom. * Ss make their own dialogues in pairs - I should wash my clothes. - public pairs & corrections 4- Consolidation: - T reminds sts of the notes above 5- Homework: -Learn your lesson. - Do B1/ 83 - workbook - Prepare B3 and the 15 minute - test. Week:10(29) Period: 83. Unit 13: ACTIVITIES ( cont ) B. COME AND PLAY (B3 + 15’-TEST). I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: T gives practice in reading comprehension about scuba-diving & practice using modal verbs, intonation of the poem. 2. Skills : reading comprehension, listening, speaking, reading & writing 3. Attitude: be polite II . Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: about scuba-diving 2. Grammar: modal verbs: can, must, should, ought to III.Teaching methods:.

(198) Communicative approach Eliciting, questions & answers, pair/ group work. IV. Teaching aids cassette, pictures & sub- boards. V .Procedures: 1-Greeting and taking the attendance 2- Review of the previous lesson: No checking THE FOURTH ENGLISH TEST Time: 15 minutes I. Matching.(3ms) Adjectives. Adverbs. 1. good a. slowly 2. bad b. badly 3. slow c. well 4. sudden d. suddenly 5. skillful e. interestingly 6. interesting f. skillfully II. Complete the sentences with SO/ TOO / EITHER/ NEITHER.(7ms) 1. Minh’s brother is a good swimmer and ……………....................... 2. Tuan isn’t a tennis player and……..………..................................... 3. I play badminton and….………….................................................. 4. She likes durian and......................................................................... 5. We watched TV last night and......................................................... 6. They don’t like monkeys and........................................................... 7. We aren’t hungry and....................................................................... * ANSWERS: I..(3ms) 0.5 for each right answer 1. c 2. b 4. d 5.f. 3. a 6.e. II. Complete the sentences with so/ too/ either/ neither(7ms) 1. Students’ answers 3- New lesson Teacher and Ss’ activities Content * Warm up: - T ask ss to role play s1-s2 S1: Come and play volleyball. “ Invite your friend to play volleyball . S2: I’m sorry. I don’t think I can..

(199) But your friend refuses” - Sts do this task in pairs - public pairs & corrections * T: - Do you like sports? - What sports do you like best? -T: elicit the new lesson B3/ * T has sts look at the picture, guessing the sport ( scuba- diving ) + Do you know this sport ? + Where can you see people play this kind of sport ? + What do you need in order to scuba dive ? ( special breathing equipment ) Ss: answer - T: teach the vocabulary -Drill pronunciation - T: write –Ss: copy down -T: check vocabulary * Sts work in groups of 6 to do T /F - public answers & corrections * correcting the false sentences. Sports B3/ Read. Then answer the questions. * Vocabulary: - special breathing equipment - invention (n): sự phát minh - scuba- diving: môn lặn có bình dưỡng khí - deep sea: sâu dưới đáy biển - diving vessel: tàu ngầm - explore (v): thám hiểm, khám phá * Questions: True or False ? 1F, 2T, 3F, 4F, 5T * Corrections: a/ Most of the world's surface is water (F) b/ T c/ Now, scuba-diving is a popular sport because people can swim freely in the water with the help of special breathing equipments (F) d/ Jacques Cousteau invented a deep-sea diving vessel (F) / Scuba-diving became / was a popular sport then. e/ T. 4- Consolidation: - Retell the content of the text. 5-. Homework: -Learn your lesson. - Do B - workbook - Prepare A1 - unit 14 (talk about free time activities, make the reply to invitations, make inquiries about & express preferences.).

(200) Week 29 Singnature: 14/03/2012. Week:11(30) Period: 84. Unit 14 : FREETIME FUN A - TIME FOR T.V - ( 1 ). I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to talk about free time activities, make the reply to invitations, make inquiries about & express preferences. *Education: be polite *Skills : listening, speaking, reading & writing II . Language contents: * Vocabulary: about free time fun * Grammar : like & prefer + to-infinitive / gerund prepositions & expressions of time III. Techniques: eliciting, questions & answers, pair/ group work. IV. Teaching aids: cassette, pictures & sub- boards. V.Procedures: 1- Greeting and taking the attendance 2- Review of the previous lesson: No checking.

(201) 3-New lesson Teacher’s and Ss’ activities * Warm up: (5’) - T: ask some questions + What do you usually do in the evening? + How often do you watch TV? + What time do you watch TV? + At home? Somewhere else? + What is your favorite program? -T: lead in A1/ * ( 5') T asks ss: - T has ss look at the listing & guess where it is from - T has ss look at the picture & guess what Hoa's family is doing - T introduces the content of the dialogue +Hoa & Lan are talking about what they often do in the evening - T has ss predict what they often do * ( 20') Sts read the dialogue while listening to the tape - T asks ss some questions + Does Hoa’s family like to watch TV? + What do they do? + Does Hoa like to play chess ? + Does Lan prefer to watch T.V ? - T introduces the structures - Sts repeat the dialogue, then play the roles in pairs - public pairs & corrections - Sts read through the dialogue & do the multiple choice individually - cross check - public answers & corrections - writing the answers in full sentences as homework * (10') Discuss : What do you prefer / like to do in the evening ? ( in pairs ) - guiding A1 / 87- workbook. Content * Warm up: - I do my homework. - I sometimes watch TV. - At 5 pm. - movies/ music/ sports A1/ Listen. Then practice with a partner. * Vocabulary: - cricket (n): con dế - adventure (n): cuộc phiêu luu * Structures: prefer + to- infinitive / gerund EX: They prefer to do other things. I prefer walking to cycling. - like + to- infinitive / gerund EX: I like listening to music late at night. to listen. * Answers : a - C , b - A , c - B , d - C , e-D. * Discuss: What do you like to do in the evening ?. 4- Consolidation: ( 2') - T reminds ss of the structures above.

(202) 5- Homework: ( 3' ) -Learn your lesson. - Do A1/ 87 - workbook - Prepare A2 - unit 14. Week:11(30) Period: 85. Unit 14 : FREETIME FUN A - TIME FOR T.V - ( 2 ). I. Objectives: T gives practice in making suggestions & talking about free time activities *Education: be polite *Skills : listening, speaking, reading & writing II . Language contents: * Vocabulary: about free time fun * Grammar : Would you like to...?, Let's... , What about...?, Can you make it on...? III. Techniques: eliciting, questions & answers, pair/ group work. IV. Teaching aids: pictures & sub- boards. V.Procedures: 1- Greeting and taking the attendance 2- Review of the previous lesson: Students read the dialogue (A1) Answer the questions: What does Lan invite Hoa to do? (eat dinner with her family) Why doesn’t Hoa’s family have a TV? (Her aunt and her uncle don’t like watching TV). 3- New lesson Teacher’s and Ss’ activities * Warm up: (5’) * Ss have 3 minutes to write sentences , using LIKE/ PREFER (two teams) -The team which write more sentences is winner A2/ ( 35’) * T has ss look at the picture & talk in pairs about what they (don't) like to do in their free time - T presents the content of the dialogue. Content * Warm up: EX : - I like listening to music. - I don't like watching T.V. - I prefer watching cartoons. A2/ Listen and read. Then practice with a partner * Note: - Would you like to...? + That sounds good..

(203) * Sts listen to the dialogue - practicing the dialogue in pairs, changing the roles - T calls ss ' attention to the structures of the lesson. - What would you like to...? - Can you make it on...? - How about...? - What about...? + No. Sorry. + That's OK. - cowboy (n): cao bồi - detective (n): thám tử - T has ss make up similar conversations * Make up a similar conversation in pairs ( ss make their schedules, T A: Would you like to go to the theater makes mapped dialogue ) this week ? - public pairs & corrections B: That sounds great. What would you like to see ? A: There is a play on at the Youth theater. B: OK. Can you make it on Monday night? A: Sorry. The theater doesn't open on Monday nights. How about Wednesday ? B: I'm sorry I think I can't. I'm going to learn for my English test. What about Saturday ?Are you free that day ? A: Yes, I am. Let's go on Saturday. 4-Consolidation: ( 2') - T reminds ss of the structures above 5- Homework: ( 3' ) -Learn your lesson. - Do A2, A3/ 88, 89 - workbook - Prepare A3, A4 - unit 14 (talk about some programs on TV). Week:11(30) Period: 86. Unit 14 : FREETIME FUN A - TIME FOR T.V - ( 3). I. Objectives: T gives practice in reading for comprehension & in pronunciation & intonation, about T.V & T.V programs *Education: be polite *Skills : speaking & reading II . Language contents:.

(204) * Vocabulary: talk about T.V & T.V programs * Grammar : simple past III. Techniques: eliciting, questions & answers, pair/ group work. IV . Teaching aids: pictures & sub- boards. V.Procedures: 1- Greeting and checking the attendance 2- Review of the previous lesson: Read dialogue 3- New lesson Teacher’s and Ss’ activities * Warm up: (5’) * T: ask a question: What do you often do in your free time? -Ss: answer by writing on the board ( two teams) - T: check and correct A3/ ( 35') * T asks ss some questions to lead in the lesson + Do you like watching T.V ? + Do you have TV set at home ? + What about your neighbor ? + What about ten years ago ? 30 years ago ? + Was T.V a popular thing 30 years ago ? + What happened ? - T introduces the content of the text * Ss read the text silently - T elicits & explains the new words - Ss work individually, filling the missing words - cross check, writing their answers on board - T has the class discuss & correct the answers on board - T asks some questions to check ss' comprehension * Ss talk about T.V. Content * Warm up: * Free time A3/ Read T.V in Viet Nam. * Vocabulary: - Times have changed - gather- gathered -to sit- sat. * Answers: 1/ people 2/ not 3/ T.V 4/ popular 5/ evening 6/ gather. 7/ they 8/ today 9/ have 10/ life 11/ know.

(205) 4- Consolidation: ( 2') - T reminds ss of the remember above 5- Homework: ( 3' ) -Learn your lesson. - Do A4/ 89 - workbook - Prepare B1, B2- unit 14 (Listening & talking about T.V & T.V programs ) Week 30 Singnature:. Week:12(31) Period: 87. Unit 14: FREETIME FUN(cont) B - WHAT'S ON? ( 1,2 ). I. . Objectives: 1. Knowledge: Making inquiries about & express preferences ( cont ) + Listening & talking about T.V & T.V programs (cont) + Listening for specific information 2.Skills: listening, speaking, reading, writing 3.Attitude: be polite II. Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: talk about T.V & T.V programs 2. Grammar : like / prefer + to- inf like / prefer + gerund simple past & simple present III. Teaching methods: Communicative approach Eliciting, questions & answers, pair/ group work. IV . Teaching aids: cassette, pictures & sub- boards. V.Procedures: 1- Greeting and taking the attendance 2- Review of the previous lesson: Students read the text about TV in Viet Nam (page 142).

(206) 3- New lesson Teacher’s and Ss' activities * Warm up: - T: introduce the game - Ss: play the game ( write some TV programs which they know) - two teams (A & B) - T: check -T: ask + Do you have a TV set at home? + Do you like watching TV? +What programs do you like best? -T: lead in to the new lesson B1/ * T has ss look at the picture & ask: + What kind of T.V program is the character from ? + Do you like this program ? -T: This is Ba & Nga. They are talking some TV programs which they like. Before listening the dial, guess and choose the programs they like. -Ss: choose - T write * Ss listen to the recordings twice - Ss check their guessing - T: explain some difficult words and sentences. - Ss: practice the dialogue - Ss play the roles before the class & corrections _ T: Ba wants to know what Nga likes to watch on TV. What does he ask? -T: elicit the structure -T asks ss to practice the structures -T: give some hints * Ss find the answers in pairs - public pairs & corrections - writing the answers as homework. Content * Warm up: Play a game “ Who is faster” cartoons TV program movies sports series News. B1/ Listen. Then practice with a partner * Guessing. * Remember - What kind of programs do you like ? -I like to watch programs about teenagers. - I don't really like watching sports. I prefer taking part in them. * like /prefer + to-inf * like / prefer + V-ing * Word cue drill - cartoons - News.

(207) - series - children’s programs - movies * Answers: a/ No, she doesn't. Because there aren't many good programs for teenagers b/ Ba watches sports shows, cartoons and movies. c/ She likes to watch programs about teenagers in other countries. d/ Nga doesn't like music programs on T.V because they don't play the kind of music she likes e/ This evening Nga is going to listen to the radio and may be read a book B2/ Listen. Write the times of the programs B2/ - T ask ss to read the list of programs -T; ask + Which programs do you like watching ? + Do you like watching ……? + What time do you know each of the programs on ? - T ask ss to guess the times * Ss listen to the tape & write the answers - 2nd listening & check the answers individually - cross check & public answers & corrections. programs guessing a/ Children's programs b/ The Early News c/ Weather Forecast d/ The World Today e/ The movie "A Fistful of dollars. listening 5.00 6.00 6.10 6.15 7.00. 4- Consolidation: - T reminds sts of the remember above 5-Homework: - Learn remember by heart - Do B1, B2 – workbook - Prepare B3, B4- unit 14 (writing & reviews vocabulary relating to T.V ).

(208) Week:12(31) Period: 88. Unit 14: FREETIME FUN(cont) B - WHAT'S ON ? ( 3,4 ). I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: T gives further practice in listening & reading to present new vocabulary. T gives practice in writing & reviews vocabulary relating to T.V 2.Skills : listening, speaking, reading & writing 3. Attitude: Study hard II. . Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: about T.V & T.V programs 2. Grammar: simple past & simple present III . Teaching methods Communicative approach Eliciting, questions & answers, pair/ group work. IV. Teaching aids: cassette, pictures & sub- boards. V.Procedures: 1- Greeting and taking the attendance 2- Review of the previous lesson: Students read the dialogue (page 144) and answer these questions: +Does Nga what a lot of TV? Why?/ Why not? No, she doesn't. Because there aren't many good programs for teenagers +What does Ba like to watch on TV? Ba watches sports shows, cartoons and movies. 3- New lesson Teacher’s and Ss' activities * Warm up: - T: ask ss to ask and answer( pair work) - T: check some pairs - T: lead in B3/ * T has ss look at the pictures & asks if they can identify any of the people in the pictures * The pictures + The Music band Moffats + The famous inspector Sherlock Holmes + A scene from the " To the peak. Content * Warm up: - What kind of programs do you like ? -I like to watch programs about teenagers B3/ Listen and read. Then answer the questions * Vocabulary. - pop music - band (n): ban nhạc - perform (v): trình diễn - contest (n): cuộc thi - contestant (n): người dự thi - import (n): sản phẩm nhập khẩu - series (n): phim truyền hình nhiều tập.

(209) of the Olympia " T.V contest - T elicits the words: pop music, contests, imports - T introduces the content of the lesson - Ss listen to the tape, repeat the lesson - Ss read the tape to themselves to find the answers in pairs - public pairs & corrections * What do you think is popular with teenagers ? B4/ - T elicits the meanings of the words in the box - T sets the task: choose the words from the box and complete the passage on their own - public passage & corrections * T asks ss some questions about Vietnam & local situations. * Answers: a/ Teenagers like to hear the latest pop music and see the shows of their favorite artists. b/ In contest programs, the contestants are students, workers or family members c/ Imports usually include police and hospital series d/ I want to see... B4/ Write. Complete the passage. Use the words in the box 1/ around 6/ like 2/ watch 7/ station 3/ listen 8/ receive 4/ series 9/ cities 5/ show 10/ possible. 4- Consolidation: - T reminds ss of the remember above * Remember: - What kinds of programs do you like ? I like programs about... - Teenagers like to hear the latest pop music. - I don't really like ... - I prefer... 5- Homework: -Learn by heart the lesson. - Prepare 45-minute test. Week:12(31) Period: 88*. REVISION. I. . Objectives: 1. KnowledgeReview students of ordinary verbs: Like and Prefer; Past simple tense; adverbs of manner; modal verbs; So, too, either and neither. 2. Skills: Writing 3. Attitude: Not available.

(210) II. Language contents: 1.Grammar: review 2. Vocabulary: III Teaching methods Commnicative approach Eliciting, questions & answers IV. Teaching aids: sub- boards V.Procedures: 1- Greeting and taking the attendance 2- Review of the previous lesson: No checking 3- New lesson Teacher’s and Ss' activities T reminds the structures and how to use. Ss listen and copy down.. Content 1. Like and Prefer a. Like + to infinitive: thích Nói về sự lựa chọn và thói quen * Like + to infinitive: Dùng nói về sự lựa chọn. Ex: I like to watch programs about teenagers in other countries. * Like + to infinitive: Dùng nói về thói quen. b. Like + V-ing: thích(=enjoy) Ex: Do you like cooking? c. Prefer: thích điều gì hơn c.1. Prefer + to infinitive: dùng khi chúng ta muốn đề cập đến sự ưa thích điều gì đó hơn khi rơi vào một tình huống đặc biệt Ex: Can I give you a lift? – No, thanks. I prefer to walk. Let’s go to the movie.- No, thanks. I prefer to watch TV. c.2. Prefer + V-ing: dùng khi chúng ta muốn đề cập đến sự ưa thích điều gì đó hơn một điều khác.

(211) Ex: I prefer going for a picnic Do you like swimming?-Yes, but I prefer playing tennis. d. Prefer sth TO sth: thích (cái gì) hơn (cái gì) Ex: I prefer coffee to orange juice e. Prefer doing sth to doing sth: thích làm gì hơn làm gì Ex: I prefer playing volleyball to playing tennis. * Prefer + to infinitive + rather than + to infinitive f. Each other: với nhau, lẫn nhau > 2 người, vật Ex: They often write to each other. g. One another: với nhau, lẫn nhau > 3 người, vật trở lên T asks Ss to write the structures and tell how to use. Ss listen and copy down.. Ex: We should love and respect (tôn trọng) one another. 2. Past simple tense A> TO BE: I/ He/ She/ It + was You/ They/ We + were (can/ could, may/ might, will/ would, shall/ should, must/ have to/ had to) *Phủ định: + not sau ToBe (wasn’t/ weren’t) *Nghi vấn: Was/ Were + S …? B> ORDINARY VERBS: + KĐ: S + V_ed/ V2 (irregular) + PĐ: S + DID NOT + V.Bare. + NV: DID + S + V.Bare? + WH: WH + DID + S + V.Bare? *Regular verbs: Use 2nd column How to add -ED (regular verbs) We have many ways to add –ED to the regular verbs to make their past form. + Just add ED: play – played watch - watched.

(212) listen – listened + Double the final consonant if there is a vowel before it: stop - stopped fit – fitted * travel – travelled (also traveled) + Change Y to I if the verb ends with Y and there is a consonant before it: fly – flied study – studied try – tried But enjoy - enjoyed + Just add D: love – loved like – liked How to pronounce -ED - Is pronounced /t/ when the verbs end with: sh, ch, k, p, ss, x, c, ge, ce, th (θ) Ex: watched, stopped, looked, kissed,… - Is pronounced / id/ when the verbs end with: t, d Ex: wanted, needed, fitted,… - Is pronounced /d/ for all other cases Ex: learned, studied, played,… 3. Adverbs of manner Adjectives + ly = Adverbs of manner 4. Modal verbs Can, could, may, might, will, would, shall, should, must, have to,… Structures: S + modal V + V(bare infinitive) S + Modal V + not + V(bare infinitive) Modal V + S + V(bare infinitive)? (Yes/No question ) 5. So, Too, Neither and either So + auxiliary verbs + S (affirmative) Neither + auxiliary verbs + S (negative) S + verbs/auxiliary , too S + V(negative)/ Auxiliary(negative), either.. 4- Consolidation:.

(213) Ss review old strutures. 5- Homework Prepare a 45 minute-test Week 31 Singnature: 28/03/2012. Week:13(32) Period: 89. THE FOURTH ENGLISH TEST. I. . Objectives: Check students’ knowledge from Unit 12 to Unit 14 II. . Language contents: Grammar and vocabulary (review) III. Question system. Matrix Chủ đề Listening Reading. Nhận biết TN TL. Thông hiểu TN TL 5c 2.5đ 2c 4c. Vân dụng TN TL. Tổng 5c 2.5đ 8c.

(214) THE FOURTH ENGLISH TEST I. LANGUAGE FOCUS(2.5marks) Choose the best option to complete each of the following sentences. 1. What …… …….TV programs do you like ? a. kinds b. kinds of c. of kind d. are 2. I like carrot and my father does, … a. either b. neither c. too d. so 3. John prefers …………. table tennis to watching TV. a. plays b. played c. playing d. play 4. Would you like ……….… dinner at my house tonight? a. have b. to have c. having d. has 5. Don’t eat …………….… candy. a. too many b. a lot c. too much d. little 6. In 1960s, most ………..…… in Vietnam didn’t have a TV set. a. people b. family c. office d. school 7. Tam … to music at present. a. listening b. is listening c. listen d. listened 8. Mr. Lam is a doctor, and … a. so am I. b. I am either c. neither am I. d. I do, too 9. My father drives his car very ……….……… a. careful b. carefully c. careless d. care 10. Minh must ……….… his homework before he plays soccer. a. finished b. finish c. finishing d. finishes II. READING (2.5marks) Read the following passage carefully. People of different ages have different hobbies for TV programs. Young children like watching cartoons best, so there are many films of this kind on children’s corner. Teenagers like sports shows, fashion shows, movies (often detective), music (often pop and rock) and sometimes cartoons. But there are not many good programs for people of this age. Adults prefer to watch the news, reports, movies and contests. Old people like watching and listening to classical music best. They also watch movies, the news and other programs that suits them. A/. Tick True (T) or False (F) for the statements.. 1, … ….Young children like listening pop and rock best. 2, … …. Adults prefer to watch the news, reports, movies and contests B/. Answer the questions: 1. Who likes watching cartoon best? 2. What do adults prefer to watch?.

(215) 3. What do old people like watching and listening? 4. What kinds of programs do you like? III. WRITING (2.5marks) Write a 5-sentence passage about some kinds of programs on TV and talked about your favorite programs. IV. LISTENING(2.5marks) Listen then write the times of the programs 1. Early News 2. Children’s program 3. weather forecast. .…………………… ……………………… ………………………... 4. Movies” “ A Firstful of Dallars” 5. The World Today.. ……………………….. ………………………… ANSWER KEY:. I. LANGUAGE FOCUS(2.5marks) 0.25 mark for each right answer 1. b. kinds of 2. d. so 3. c. playing 4. b. to have 5. c. too much 6. a. people 7. b. is listening 8. a. so am I. 9. b. carefully 10. b. finish II. READING (2.5marks) A/.0.25 mark for each right answe 1. F. 2. T. B/. 0.5 mark for each right answer 1. Young children like watching cartoons best. 2. Adults prefer to watch the news, reports, movies and contests..

(216) 3. Old people like watching and listening to classical music best. 4. student’s answer III. WRITING (2.5marks) 0.5 mark for each right sentence. Suggested answer: There are a lot of programs on TV: Children’s program, music, Weather forecast …. In children’s program , there are cartoons. In music , we often see pop music, classical music….. IV. LISTENING(2.5marks) Listen then write the times of the programs 1. Early News. 6.00. 2. Children’s program. 5.00. 3. Weather forecast. 6.10. 4. Movies” “ A Firstful of Dallars” 5. The World Today.. 7.00. 6.15. Lời trong băng: Ba: What is on TV at six tonight, Lan? Lan: ;Let me see. It’s the early news. You want to watch it, don’t you? Ba: come on, Lan! i want to watch the movie” a Firstful of Dollars” When does it start? Lan: It starts at seven o’clock, after the program “ The World Today” at a quarter past six. Ba: And what about the weather forecast ? What time is it on? Lan: It’s on at ten past six. But we should watch our children’s program. It starts at five. Ba: OK. That sounds great.. Week:13(32) Period: 90. THE ANSWER TO THE FOURTH ENGLISH TEST.

(217) I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to remember the knowledge from Unit 12o Unit 14 II. Teaching aids Teaching plan, questions of the test. III. Procedures: 1- Greeting and taking the attendance. 2- Review of the previous lesson: ( No checking) 3- New lesson Teacher’s and Ss’ activities. Content I. LANGUAGE FOCUS(2.5marks). 0.25 mark for each right answer - T asks ss to do the test again 1. b. kinds of - T calls some ss to check the 2. d. so answers. 3. c. playing - T corrects. 4. b. to have 5. c. too much 6. a. people 7. b. is listening 8. a. so am I. 9. b. carefully 10. b. finish - T asks ss to read the text again. II. READING (2.5marks) - Students check the boxes. - T corrects.. A/.0.25 mark for each right answe 1. F. 2. T. B/. 0.5 mark for each right answer 4. Young children like watching cartoons best. 5. Adults prefer to watch the news, reports, movies and contests. 6. Old people like watching and listening to classical music best. 4. student’s answer III. WRITING (2.5marks) 0.5 mark for each right sentence..

(218) - T asks ss to work in pairs to find out the mistakes and give correct ones. - T calls ss to write the answers on the board. - T corrects.. Suggested answer: There are a lot of programs on TV: Children’s program, music, Weather forecast …. In children’s program , there are cartoons. In music , we often see pop music, classical music….. IV. LISTENING(2.5marks) Listen then write the times of the programs. 1. Early News 6.00 - T asks ss to read the open text again. 2. Children’s program 5.00 - T reads the text and asks ss to 3. Weather forecast 6.10 complete. - T calls some ss to give the answer. 4. Movies” “ A Firstful of Dallars” - T corrects. 5. The World Today.. 7.00. 6.15. Lời trong băng: Ba: What is on TV at six tonight, Lan? Lan: ;Let me see. It’s the early news. You want to watch it, don’t you? Ba: come on, Lan! i want to watch the movie” a Firstful of Dollars” When does it start? Lan: It starts at seven o’clock, after the program “ The World Today” at a quarter past six. Ba: And what about the weather forecast ? What time is it on? Lan: It’s on at ten past six. But we should watch our children’s program. It starts at five. Ba: OK. That sounds great..

(219) 4- Consolidation: Ss correct if necessary. 5- Homework Prepare Unit 15 – A1. Week:13(32) Period: 91. Unit 15 : GOING OUT A. VIDEO GAMES (1). I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to give and respond to advice, the topic of video games and their effects *Education: be polite *Skill : listening II.Language contents: * Vocabulary: about video games * Grammar : model verbs III.Techniques: eliciting, questions & answers, pair/ group work. IV.Teaching aids: cassette, pictures & sub- boards. V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and taking the attendance. 2- Review of the previous lesson: ( No checking) 3- New lesson Teacher’s and Ss’ activities * Warm up: (5’) -T: elicit the new lesson - Ss: say - T: write -T: lead in A1/ * (35')T has ss look at the picture & asks them + What can you see in the picture ? +Are there any amusement centers town / village ?. Content * Warm up: Entertainments.

(220) +Do you often go there? + What do you do there ?  introduces amusement center and some new words. - Drill the pronunciation -T introduces : Lan & Nam are talking about video games * (18')Sts listen to the dialogue once or twice - T: ask ss to notice two questions - Sts practice the dialogue in pairs - T elicits & explains the vocabulary, calls ss' attention to the use of the imperative structure " Don't..." for giving advice & the respond " Don't..." ( What does Lan say to Nam ? ) - Sts find the answers & work in pairs asking & answering the questions - Checking the answers with the class - T gives the correct answers - Ss: practice the dialogue in pairs - public pairs. A1/ Listen. Then practice with a partner * Vocabulary.: - amusement (n): sù gi¶i trÝ, vui ch¬i - addictive (a): ( cã tÝnh ) g©y nghiÖn - arcade (n): khu vui ch¬i, mua b¸n cã m¸i vßm - video. * Questions: - What does Lan advice Nam? - How does he respond? * Remember: - Don't spend too much of your time in the arcade. - Don't worry, I won't. * Answers: a/ He's going to the amusement center. b/ He's going to play video games. c/ He goes to the amusement center about once a week. d/ No, he doesn't. He doesn't spend much money. e/ He usually stays for about an hour. f/ Nam must be careful because video games can be addictive. g/ He'll do his homework later.. 4- Consolidation: ( 2') - ss: work in groups of 4 and list the bad effects caused by videogames. - check - T reminds ss of the structures above 5- Homework: ( 3' ) -Learn your lesson. - Do A1, A2 / 94, 95- workbook - Prepare A2 ( about video games - cont ). Singnature:.

(221) Week:14(33) Period: 92. Unit 15: GOING OUT (cont) A - VIDEO GAMES (2). I. Objectives: 1.Knowledge: T introduces a compound adjective, and gives practice in reading for comprehension 2.Education: e polite 3.Skill : reading comprehension II. Language contents: 1.Vocabulary: words relating to video games 2.Grammar : compound adjective III.Teaching methdss: Communicative approach Eliciting, questions & answers, pair/ group work. IV.Teaching aids: pictures & sub- boards. V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and taking the attendance 2-Review of the previous lesson: Students read the dialogue and answer these questions: -Where is Nam going? – to the amusement center -What is he going to do? – to play video games -How often does he go? – once a week -Does he spend a lot of money? –no, he doesn’t 3- New lesson Teacher’s and Ss ' activities Content * Warm up: (5’) * Warm up: - Ss: act out the dial A1 - T: ask: Do you like playing video Student’s answers games? + How often do you play it? - Can video games be addictive?.

(222) -SS: answer - Introduce the new lesson. A2/(10’) - T: pre teach some new words - Drill the pronunciation - check -T: raise a question “ What does the doctor advise?” -Ss: answer -T: feed back and revise the modal verbs *(20') Sts listen to the passage twice - Sts read the passage silently - cross check - 2 ss read it aloud - Sts read the passage in exercise A2 to complete the sentences - Sts check their answers in pairs * (5') public pairs & corrections - Writing the answers as homework - You should take 10-minute- rest every hour you play video games. A2/ Listen and read: * Vocabulary: - inventor (n): người phát minh - dizzy ['dizi] (a):hoa mắt - social ['sou∫l] (a): giao tiếp - socialize (v): giao tiếp * All children should play outdoors. - They mustn't forget to do other things too. - They shouldn't play video games for a long time. * Answers : a - D, b - A , c - D, d – B * Bad effects: - tired -dizzy -spend time on their own *Advise: -Take park in the activities with others. -Play out doors. -Be with people of their age.. 4- Consolidation: ( 2') - T reminds ss of the vocabulary above 5-Homework: ( 3' ) -Learn your lesson. - Do A1, A2 / 94, 95- workbook - Prepare A3 ( video games - cont ). Week:14(33) Period: 93. Unit 15: GOING OUT B. IN THE CITY (1,2). I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge:Describing & comparing city life with country life, T gives practice in listening & reading for comprehension. Reviewing: talking about likes & dislikes..

(223) 2. Education: hard- working 3. Skills : listening , speaking , reading & writing II. Language contents: * Vocabulary: about in the city * Grammar : What do you do ? Do, does, did (Au) III.Teaching methods Eliciting, questions & answers, pair/ group work. Communicative approach IV.Teaching aids: pictures & sub- boards. V. Procedures: 1-Greeting and taking the attendance 2. Review of the previous lesson: No checking 3-New lesson Teacher’s and Ss ' activities Content * Warm up: * T: ask Student’s answers - Do you like playing video game? - What are the applications of videos in our life? * Ss: answer - T: lead in B1/ B1/ Listen. Then practice with a partner - T: introduce the text and ask ss to * pre- reading questions guess what Hoa could do when she - Who likes living in the countryside Lan or got used to the city life. Hoa ? Why ? -Ss: guess * Remember: The simple present tense - T: feed back - What do you do in the evening? * Sts listen to the tape twice - I don't like the city very much. -Ss: compare with their - The noise keeps me awake at night guessing. - get used to: thích nghi - Ss repeat the dialogue * used to + V: đã từng - checking the questions above * get used to + V-ing ..: quen với - T elicits & explains the * Answers: vocabulary a/ She goes to the school theater once a week. - Ss practice the dialogue in pairs The rest of the week she usually stays at home - Ss read the dialogue again to in the evening. answer the questions in pairs b/ No, she doesn't like the city. - public pairs c/ Before, Hoa lived in a village near Hue. * T gives the correct answers d/ She liked living there because she knew the - writing as homework people in her neighborhood, the village was quiet and there was only a little traffic. e/ She doesn't like the city because it is noisy.

(224) and the roads are busy. f/ She hates crossing the road most because bikes, motorbikes and cars come from every B2/ direction, and they scare her. * T asks ss similar questions to set B2/ Work with a partner the model a/ What do you do in the evening? * Ss work in pairs, asking & b/ Do you like city? Why? Why not? answering the questions c Do you like the city? Why? Why not? * public pairs & corrections 4-Consolidation: - T reminds ss of Auxiliary: do, does, did 5- Homework -Learn your lesson. - Do B1, B2 / 96 - workbook - Prepare B3 ( the use of like / prefer ). Week:14(33) Period: 94. Unit 15: GOING OUT B. IN THE CITY (3). I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge:T gives practice in reading for comprehension & reviews the use of like / prefer + to-infi / like + gerund. 2. Education: hard-working 3. Skills : listening , reading II. Language contents: 1.Vocabulary: words about the city & the country 2.Grammar : like / prefer + to-infi ; like + gerund III.Teaching methods: Eliciting, questions & answers, pair/ group work. Communicative approach IV.Teaching aids: pictures & sub- boards. V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and taking the attendance 2- Review of the previous lesson: Ss read the dialogue (B1) Ss answer the questions: -What does Hoa do in the evening?( She goes to the school theater once a week. The rest of the week she usually stays at home in the evening).

(225) -Does she like the city?( No, she doesn't) -Where did she live before? (Hoa lived in a village near Hue) … 3-New lesson Teacher’s and Ss ' activities Content * Warm up: * Warm up: - T : tell some reasons why Hoa doesn’t Hoa dislikes: like the city( in B1) - noise -T: + Do you like the city? Why? - traffic … + What do you do in the evening? - feedback & corrections B3/ * T has ss look at the picture & guess B3/ Read how Hoa feels about the city * pre-reading questions: - T introduces: the text tells how Hoa 1/ How did Hoa get used to the city life ? got used to the city life. Read the text & 2/ What could she do ? find out what she could do * Comprehension questions: * Ss read the passage to themselves to 1/ What did Hoa and her friends often do answer the questions above together ? ( They talked & listened to music or * public check & corrections helped each other with their homework, or - Ss read the passage aloud they played table tennis, etc ) - T asks ss some questions 2/ Why did Hoa rarely go to see movies or + What...?/ Why ...? eat out in the evening ? ( Because they were - T tells ss the verbs in B3 are in the far too expensive ) simple past tense 3/ Why couldn't Hoa read many books in her - T asks ss to make a list of things Hoa village ? ( Because there wasn't a library does in the evening, using the verbs in there ) the simple present tense 4/ Why did Hoa decide that the city wasn't so - cross check bad after all ? ( Because she got used to it ) - public check & T provides the correct * Make a list of the things Hoa does in the answers evening - She visits her friends - She talks and listens to music with her friends. - They help each other with their homework. - She plays table tennis and plays chess with her friends. - She socializes with her friends. - She goes to the library and borrows books 4-Consolidation Make sentences, using like/ prefer + to – infinitive; like + gerund 5-Homework Prepare B4 + KT 15’.

(226) Week 33 Singnature:. Week:15(34) Period: 95. Unit 15: GOING OUT (cont) B. IN THE CITY (B4+15’-TEST). I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of this lesson ss will be able to talk able to talk about the activities their friends did. 2.Skills: Listening, writing. 3. Attitude: Study hard II Language Contents: Past simple tense III.Teaching methods Communicative approach Eliciting, questions & answers, pair/ group work. IV.Teaching aids: Pictures V. Procedures: 1-Greeting and taking the attendance 2- Review of the previous lesson: No checking THE THIRD 15- MINUTE-TEST. I/. Match the questions and the answers correctly. Questions Answers 1. Do the children like cartoons? a. Yes. They like cartoons. 2. What kinds of programs do you like? b. Yes, she does. 3. Does Hoa live in the city? c. No, I don’t. 4. Do you like living in the city? d. I often read and watch TV. 5. Do old people prefer News to films? e. I like series and music. 6. What do you do in the evening? f. Yes, they do. II/. Use the correct forms of the verbs: 1. He prefers playing chess to ……………… TV. ( watch).

(227) 2. They are going to …………… video games. (play) 3. Children should not …………………..much time on video games. ( spend) 4. I …………………. the city. (like) 5. Yesterday, I …………….. at home. (stay) 6. I don’t ............ the city very much. ( like) 7. You must ……………. careful. Video games can be addictive. (be) ANSWER KEY: I/. 3ms 0,25m per each answer 1.a 2.e 3.b 4. c 5. f 6. d II/. 7ms 0,5 m per each answer 1. watching 2. play 3. spend 4. like 5. stayed 6. like 7. be 3- New lesson Teacher’s and students’ activities. Content B4/ Listen. Match each name to an activity. B4/ * T calls on some ss to name the activity pictured - Sts listen to the cassette & match... Ba - b, - cross check Hoa - a, - public answers & corrections Nga - d, Nam - c, Lan - f, Post- listening: An - e Write it up. Ask Ss to write what they did in the * Tape transcript: pictures Yesterday evening, Ba played table tennis. Nga saw a movie. Lan went to a restaurant. eg : Hoa played chess. Nam listened to CDs. a. Yesterday evening. Nga saw movie,. An watched a soccer match. Hoa played chess b Yesterday evening Ba played table tennis. 4- Consolidation: - Retells the contents of the text..

(228) -Wrie what did you do yesterday evening. 5- Homework: ( 2' ) - Do B4,5 – workbook - Prepare unit 16 - A1 & A2 (traveling to different places in S. E. Asia ) .. Week:15(34) Period: 96. Unit16: PEOPLE AND PLACES A - FAMOUS PLACES IN ASIA - ( 1,2 ). I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: T presents the topic of countries and capital cities and gives practice in talking about traveling to different places in S. E. Asia . Reviewing ss' knowledge on geography and gives practice in copying the names of some of the Asian countries. 2.Education: work hard 3. Skills : speaking & writing II. Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: about the famous places in Asia. 2.Grammar : adverbs of frequency, modal verb : MAY III.Teaching methods Communicative approach Eliciting, questions & answers, pair/ group work. IV.Teaching aids: cassette, pictures & sub- boards. V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and taking the attendance 2- Review of the previous lesson: No checking 3- New lesson Teacher’s and Ss ' activities * Warm up: - T : elicit the new lesson - T: ask ss to name some countries and their capital cities in Asia - Ss: name -T: feed back - T: Do you sometimes see these cities on TV? -T: lead in to the new lesson. A1/ - T: introduce some countries, their. Content * Warm up: Indonesia Thailand Asia Lao Vientiane. Malaysia Kuala Lumpur. Singapore Cambodia A1/ Listen. Then practice with a partner - album (n): tập đựng ảnh.

(229) capital cities and new word by pictures, … - T introduces the content of the dialogue, has ss listen to the dialogue, paying attention to the adverbs of frequency (usually, sometimes, occasionally ) - Ss practice the dialogue in pairs, changing roles - public pairs - T guides ss to do the exercise - public answers - providing the answers & corrections A2/ * T has ss read the names of the cities & match them with the countries in the box - public answers & corrections - writing as homework. - pilot (n) phi công -region (n) vùng, miền * True or False ? 1/ Ba's uncle is an engineer. 2/ Uncle Nghia sends his pictures to Ba from the cities he visits. 3/ Ba also keeps the stamps. 4/ Ba and Hoa would like to visit many countries. 5/ Hoa doesn't want to see the stamps.  1 - F, 2 - F, 3 - T, 4 - T, 5 - F * Answers: a - D, b - F, c - B, d - C, e - A, f – E A2/ Complete the table Capital - Bangkok - Beijing - Kuala Lumpur - Phnom Penh - Vientiane - Yangon - Jakarta. Country - Thailand - China - Malaysia - Cambodia - Laos - Myanmar - Indonesia. * usually - Hong Kong * T sets the task, takes notes - Bangkok - Bangkok - usually * Sometimes - Singapore - sometimes - Kuala Lumpur - T explains the task & gives sts - Singapore models - Jakarta - Ss work in pairs * Occasionally * public pairs & corrections - Phnom Penh - Vientiane - Yangon * It's in... 4- Consolidation: - T reminds Ss of the note. 5- Homework: -Learn your lesson. - Do A1, A2 – workbook. - Prepare unit 16 - A3 & A4 (Know some places in Asia and their destinations).

(230) Week:15(34) Period: 97. Unit16 : People and places A - FAMOUS PLACES IN ASIA - ( 3,4 ). I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: T gives practice in listening for specific information & reading for comprehension. The topic is about different places in Asia, preferences, vacation destination 2.Education: want to know about other places 3.Skills : listening & reading comprehension II. Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: about the famous places in Asia. 2. Grammar : adverbs of frequency, modal verb : MAY III.Teaching methodss: Communicative approach. Eliciting, questions & answers, pair/ group work. IV.Teaching aids: cassette, pictures & sub- boards. V. Procedures: 1-Greeting and taking the attendance 2- Review of the previous lesson: Ss read the dialogue(A1) then ask and answer the questions: Where does Ba’s uncle fly to? + He usually/ sometimes/ occasionally flies to … Where is that? + It’s in … 3- New lesson Teacher’s and Ss ' activities * Warm up: - T : have ss play a game pelmanism - T: prepare 12 cards with the name of capitals and countries - T: divide the class into 2 teams - Ss: play - T: check -T: elicit the new lesson A3 / * T has ss geess the job of the man in the picture. + Where is this man?. * Warm up: - Bangkok - China - Malaysia - Cambodia - Laos - Myanmar. Content pelmanism - Thailand - Beijing - Kuala Lumpur - Phnom Penh - Vientiane - Yangon. A3/ Listen and complete this pilot's schedule with the correct place names * Answers: Mon: Bangkok and Singapore.

(231) + What is his job? + What does a pilot do? - T introduces the situation & sets the task * Sts listen to the tape & find the answers - 2nd listening & checking the answers * T gives the correct answers - Sts retell the pilot's schedule. Tue: Singapore Wed: Jakarta Thur: Bali Fri: Bali Sat: Hong Kong Sun: back to Ha Noi * Tape transcript: On Monday, I flew to Bangkok and then to Singapore. I stayed Monday and Tuesday nights in a hotel. Then on Wednesday, I flew to Jakarta. I stayed overnight and on Thursday I flew to Bali. I stayed there Thursday & Friday. On Friday night, I went to a cultural show and saw some Balinese dancers. On Saturday, I flew to Hong Kong. I was there overnight. On Sunday, I finally flew back to Ha Noi. A4/ Listen and read. Then answer the questions Destinations * Vocabulary.: - attraction (n): sự hấp dẫn, điểm thu hút khách du lịch - ancient monument : công trình cổ - shadow puppet: múa rối bóng - coral: san hô - resort (n): khu nghỉ mát * Answers: a/ The three kinds of tourist attractions mentioned in the passage are ancient monuments, shows and resorts. A4/ * T : show the picture and ask + What kind of tourism do you like most? + If you are interested in history Where can we go? - T elicits new / difficult words * Sts listen to tape & read along the text themselves - Ss read the questions & find the answers from the passage * Ss ask & answer the questions in pairs - public pairs & corrections - Writing the answers in full sentences as homework b/ Sts' answers. * Remember: - What kinds of attractions do you prefer ? - You may prefer... - The attractions range from...to... 4- Consolidation: - T reminds ss of the remember 5-Homework: -Learn your lesson. - Do A3, A4/ 100, 101 - workbook - Prepare unit 16 - B1(in talking about famous places & people.).

(232) Week 34 Singnature:. Week:16(35) Period: 98. UNIT16 : PEOPLE AND PLACES B. FAMOUS PEOPLE (1). I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to know more abou famous people in Viet Nam. 2. Education: Not available 3. Skills: writing, listening, reading II. Language contents: 1. Vocabulary: words related to the topic “People and Places” 2. Grammar : The present simple and past tenses. III.Teaching methods: Communicative approach Eliciting, explaination, pair/ group work. IV.Teaching aids: cassette, pictures & sub- boards. V. Procedures: 1-Greeting and taking the attendance 2- Review of the previous lesson: Ss read the dialogue(A4) then write words: attraction (n), ancient monument, shadow puppet show, colorful coral, resort (n). 3- New lesson Teacher’s and Ss ' activities. Content *Warm-up:. - Who is in the picture ? - Do you know any thing about this person ?.

(233) - Which victory is the picture about ? - Do you know the famous person who was in this battle ? ..... - T hangs a picture about General Vo Nguyen Giap, then makes questions. - Ss look at the picture and answer the questions. - Ss prepare to read a conversation between Ba and Liz abour General Vo Nguyen Giap. - T plays the tape B.1 (twice) - Ss listen - T presents new words. 1.Listen.Then practice with a partner.. *Newwords: - General (n) vị tướng - Be famous for... nổi tiếng về… - Lead (v) hướng dẫn - People' s Army of Viet Nam: Quân Đội Nhân Dân Việt Nam - Commander-in-chief: Tổng Tư Lệnh - force (v) bắt buộc, dùng vũ lực với - defeat (v) đánh thắng Be good at... giỏi về … Be interested in ... thích thú về … Answer key: a) False. Liz knows nothing about -Ss copy and read... General Giap. - T lets Ss read the text and do (true / b) False. The People' s Army of VN False) defeated the French in 1954. - Ss do, then give answers in front of the c) True class. d) False. General Giap was born in 1911 e) True f) False. Ba will lend Liz some history books. 4- Consolidation: - Write about Vo Nguyen Giap and about his battle. 5-Homework: -Learn your lesson. - Do exercises in wordbooks. - Prepare unit 16 – B2.. Week:16(35) Period: 99.

(234) UNIT16 : PEOPLE AND PLACES B. FAMOUS PEOPLE (2) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge:By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to know more abou famous people in the world 2. Skills: listening, speaking, writing. 3. Attitude: Study hard II. Language contents: * Grammar : The present simple tense. III.Teaching methods Eliciting, explaination, pair/ group work. Communicative approach. IV.Teaching aids: cassette, pictures & sub- boards. V. Procedures: 1-Greeting and taking the attendance 2- Review of the previous lesson: No checking 3- New lesson Teacher’s and Ss ' activities. Content *Warm-up:. - Do you like these players ? Why ? - Do you know anything about them ? - T hangs a picture of famous football players Romario, Pele... Then makes Qs. - T asks Ss to read and complete a conversation between Hoa and Lan about Romario and Pele, use the words in the box. - Ss do then give answers.. 2.Practice. * Answer key: (1) like (2) prefer (3) guess (4) favorite. b)Now make your own dialogues about famous people you know. The adjectives in the box will help you. - T conducts Ss to make their own * Example: dialogues about famous people they -S1 : Doyou like Hong Nhung ? know. -S2 : I prefer Thanh Lam -S1 : Why ? -S2 : Because Thanh Lam is pretier than Hong Nhung 4- Consolidation:(2’).

(235) - Write about one famous person who they like. 5-Homework:( 3' ) -Learn your lesson. - Do exercises in wordbooks. - Prepare unit 16 – B4,5.. Week:16(35) Period: 100. UNIT16 : PEOPLE AND PLACES B. FAMOUS PEOPLE (4,5). I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: Reading for details about a famous people and talking about their biographies. 2. Skills: Speaking, writing. 3. Attitude: Study hard. II. Language contents: * Grammar : The present past tense. III.Teaching methods Eliciting, explaination,individual, pair/ group work. Communicative approach. IV.Teaching aids: cassette, pictures & sub- boards. V/ Procedures: 1-Greeting and taking the attendance 2- Review of the previous lesson: Ss make the dialogue as B2-b * Example: -S1 : Doyou like Hong Nhung ? -S2 : I prefer Thanh Lam -S1 : Why ? -S2 : Because Thanh Lam is pretier than HongNhung. 3- New lesson Teacher’s and Ss ' activities - T introduces: (We are going to read a * Warm-up: passage about two famous people: Thomas Edison and Hans Christian Andersen. What do you know about these two people ? Now you work in groups to make a list of the facts about them) 4. Read. - T presents words * Pre-reading.. Content.

(236) - Ss read about Thomas Edison and Hans Christian Andersen then answer the questions: - T conducts Ss to "Now work with a partner" in pairs.. * New words: - electric light bulb: bóng đèn điện tròn - power station : trạm điện - Gramophone (n) máy quay đĩa - Motion picture: phim, chiếu bóng - Fairy tales: truyện cồ tích * While-reading. - When was Thomas Edison born ? - When did he die ? - What did Thomas Edison invent ? - When was Andersen born ? - When did he die ? - What did he write ? * Post-reading: EX: -S1 : When were you born ?, Mr Edison ? -S2 : I was born in 1847 -S1 : Were you born in America ? -S2 : Yes I was 5- Listening.. - T explains the exercise and then plays the tape. Complete the biography of Uncle Ho - Ss listen to the tape then complete the Events Year Place table. Date of birth 1890 Kim Lien Left VN 1911 Saigon Work in hotel 1900s London Went to other country 1917 Paris Moved again 1923 Moscow Founded Vietnamese 1930 Guangzhou Communist Party Formed Viet Minh 1941 Viet Nam Front Became President 1945 Viet Nam Died 1969 Ha Noi 4- Consolidation: (2’) Comprehension questions a. Who was Thomas Edison ? b. What was his famous invention ? c. What did he establish ? d. What other inventions did he invent ? e. Who was Hans Chistian Andersen? f. What did he want to be ?.

(237) g . What kind of book did he write ? Key a. an inventor b. the electric light bulb c. the first central power station in New York City d. the gramophone and motion pictures. e. A danish author f. an actor g. novels, plays, poetryWrite about Thomas Edison and Hans Chiaian Andersen 5-Homework: -Learn your lesson. - Do exercises in wordbooks. - Prepare Language focus Week 35 Singnature:. Week:17(36) Period: 101. LANGUAGE FOCUS 5. I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge:- Ss review words and phrases of some above lesson 2. Skills: Writing 3. Attitude: Study hard. II. Language contents 1. Vocabulary: review 2. Grammar: review III.Teaching methods: Communicative approach Eliciting, questions & answers, pair/ group work. IV.Teaching aids: - Books, teaching plan, extra board (5) IV. Procedures: 1- Greeting and taking the attendance 2- Review of the previous lesson: 3- New lesson:.

(238) Teacher’s and students’ activities. Content 1. Adjectives and adverbs a) Check the correct box - T asks ss about the form of the Adjective Adverb adverbs of manner and then check the dangerous √ box. slowly √ - Ss work in pairs/individual work skillfully √ - T calls ss to check the answer. good √ - Ss give the answer (on the board/oral) bad √ - T corrects. quickly √ Do the same steps. b) Complete the sentences A: quickly B: . 2. Modal verbs a) Work with a partner. Read the dialogue a b) Look at the pictures and the words. Make up similar dialogues - Ss read the dialogue. Ss: Can I player soccer, Mom? - Ss make similar dialogues with the b help of the teacher. Mother: First you must practice the piano. Ss: Can I player badminton, Mom? c Mother: First you must clean up your room. Ss: Can I go fishing, Mom? d Mother: First you must post this letter. Ss: Can I watch TV, Mom? e Mother: First you must go to the market. Ss: Can I go roller-skating, - T explains the use of Should and Mom? Ought to Mother: First you must go to the - Ss make similar dialogues with the library. help of the teacher. a c) Hoa has a few problems. Give her some advice, using should or ought to.

(239) Ss 1: I’m sick. b. - T suggests ss how to do the exercise and explains new words/ phrases - T asks ss to read the menu. - Ss practice the model dialogue. - Ss make dialogues with the help of the teacher.. - T reminds ss of the past/present/future tenses - T asks ss to read the sentences and check the column in pairs. - Students work in pairs. - T calls ss to check the column on the board. - T corrects.. - T asks ss to read the words in the tables and the model dia. - Ss make similar dialogues. Students are free to express their idea. Ss 2: You should/ought to go to the doctor. Ss 1: I’m hot. c Ss 2: You shouldtake a bath. Ss 1: I’m cold.. d Ss 2: You should put a thick coat on. Ss 1: I’m tired. Ss 2: You should relax. 3. Expressing likes and dislikes Ss A: What would you like to eat: Ss B: I’d like shrimp cakes. Ss A: Would you like fress fish with lemon sauce? Ss B: Yes. That sounds nice. Ss A: Would you like ginger chicken? Ss B: I prefer sweet and sour chicken. Ss A: Would you like rice noodles? Ss B: I don’t really like rice noodles. I’d like fried rice. 4. Tenses Read the sentences. Check the correct column Past Present Future a) √ b) √ c) √ d) √ e) √ f) √ g) √ h) √ i) √ j) √ 5. Because a) Read the dialogue Now work with a partner. Make up similar dialogues. Use the words in the table and the box to help you..

(240) b) Ask your partner. Take turns to be A. students’ answers 4- Consolidation: Ss remind grammar above. 5- Homework Review language knowledge from Unit 9 to Unit 15 to have a revision of 4 periods for the final Examination. Week:17(36) Period: 101*. REVISION. I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to consolidate their knowledge about: the present simple, the past simple, the future simple tense, question words. 2. Skills: Writing, reading. 3. Attitude: Study hard II. Language contents: Grammar & vocabulary (review) III. Teaching aids: teaching plan IV. Teaching methods: Communicative approach Questions & answers III. New lesson Grammar 1. Past simple tense *The past simple tense is used to express an action that happened and stopped in the past. * Structure: +) affirmative: S + V2 /Ved * I/ She/ He + was *We/ You/ They + were +) negative: S + didn’t + V (bare infinitive) +) Interrogative: Did + S + V (bare infinitive)…? Answer: Yes, S + did/ No, S + didn’t * Note: - learn the irregular verbs by heart - remember how to pronoun the final sound ED 2. Present simple tense +) affirmative: S + V/ Vs-es +) negative: S + don’t/ doesn’t + V (bare infinitive) +) Do/ Does + S + V (bare infinitive)…) * Always, usually, often, rarely, never, every,….

(241) 3. Future simple tense ( WILL/ GOING TO) * The future simple tense is used to express an action that will happen in the future. *Structure: *Tương lai với WILL +) affirmative: S + Will + V(bare infinitive) +) negative: S + will not(won’t) + V(bare infinitive) +) interrogative: Will + S + V (bare infinitive) * Tương lai với Be going to +)affirmative: S + be (am/is/are) + going to + V (bare infinitive) +) negative: S + be not (am not/isn’t/aren’t) + V(bare infinitive) +) interrogative: Be + S + V(bare infinitive)) * tomorrow, next 2. Liệt kê các giới từ chỉ vị trí (Prepositions of position) Opposite, next to, beside, behind, between… Example: The bookstore is opposite the toy store. Week:17(36) Period: 102. REVISION. I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to consolidate their knowledge about: SO, TOO, EITHER, NIETHER 2. Skills: Writing, reading. 3. Attitude: Study hard II. Language contents: Grammar & vocabulary (review) III. Teaching aids: teaching plan IV. Teaching methods: Communicative approach Questions & answers V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and taking the attendance 2- Review of the previous lesson No checking 3- New lesson A/ Grammar 1, So &too: cũng vậy * Used to express an idea in affirmative form * Structure: So + aux./modal/be + S S + aux./modal/ be, too Ex: Mrs. Lan is a teacher. My mother is, too.

(242) 2, Neither & either: cũng vậy * Used to express an idea in negative form * Structure: Neither + aux./modal/be + S S + aux./modal/be + not, either. Ex: She didn’t go to bed at 10 last night. Neither did I. B/ Exercise Fill in the gaps with SO, TOO, EITHER, NEITHER 1. He is planting some trees, and I am,…(too) 2. She speaks English fluently, and …does Lien. (So) 3. He can’t write letters in English, and…can his younger brother. (neither) 4. I am not hungry and you aren’t,…(either) 5. Mr. Nam doesn’t like to eat fish and…does his wife. (neither) 6. He likes pineapples and …do I. (so) 7. You can do this exercise well and I can, …(too) 8. They don’t drink wine and we don’t, …(either) 9. He was ill yesterday and… his mother. (so was) 10. She worked hard and her friend…(did, too) Correct the mistakes in the following sentences: 1. You are a student and I am so. 2. My sister doesn’t go to school today and neither don’t I. 3. At weekends I am always go swimming. So does my brother. 4. Our father likes swimming, and so can we. 5. He isn’t going to learn Spanish and she isn’t, too. Answer: 1. You are a student and I am, too. 2. My sister doesn’t go to school today and neither do I. 3. At weekends I always go swimming. So does my brother. 4. Our father likes swimming, and so do we. 5. He isn’t going to learn Spanish and she isn’t, either.. Singnature: Week 36. Week:18(37) Period: 103. REVISION.

(243) I. Objectives 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to consolidate their knowledge about: modal verbs, adjectives and adverbs, imperatives. 2. Skills: Writing, reading. 3. Attitude: Study hard II. Language contents: Grammar & vocabulary (review) III. Teaching aids: teaching plan IV. Teaching methods: Communicative approach Questions & answers V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and taking the attendance 2- Review of the previous lesson No checking 3-New lesson A/ Grammar 1. Modal verbs -can: I can swim -could: He could explore the oceans of the world. -ought to: I ought to finish it. -should: I should clean my room. -may: You may prefer the ocean. -have to: I have to finish this question for math tomorrow. -must: It must be something you ate. 2. adjectives and adverbs Adjectives Adverbs good well bad badly quick quickly slow slowly skillful skillfully dangerous dangerously safe safely sudden suddenly fluent fluently Example: Did your mom wash it well? They began to ride quickly. She plays tennis badly. The game sometimes moves slowly..

(244) 3. Making an invitation/requirement Structures: Would you like to + V (bare infinitive)? Let’s + V (bare infinitive) Why don’t you + V (bare infinitive)? What about +V-ing? Example: Would you like to go to the cinema tonight? Why don’t you relax? What about going to the movies? Let’s buy a pineapple and a papaya. Exercise: Choose the best option 1. I can ………………..chess (play, playing, to play, played) 2. Let’s ……………….to the movies. (go, going, to go, goes) 3. You should …………….your hand before meals. ( wash, washes, washed, to wash) 4. They are ………………students. (good, badly, well, carefully) 5. He speaks French ………….( careful, fluent, fluently, carelss) Answer: 1. play 2. go 3. wash 4. good 5. fluently * Homework: Review form of verbs, too, so, either and neither Week:18(37) Period: 104. REVISION. I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to consolidate their knowledge about: verb forms. 2. Skills: Writing, reading. 3. Attitude: Study hard II. Language contents: Grammar & vocabulary (review) III. Teaching aids: teaching plan IV. Teaching methods: Communicative approach Questions & answers V. Procedures: 1- Greeting and taking the attendance 2- Review of the previous lesson No checking 3- New lesson A/ Grammar 1. To infinitive: We use To infinitive after the other verbs or in some structures: Would you like…..? Prefer/like…….

(245) 2. Bare infinitive: We use bare infinitive after modal verbs. In the negative form, the main verb is used without to. 3. Gerund(v-ing): We use gerund(v-ing) after: prepositions, enjoy, like, prefer 4. too, so, either, neither B/ Exercises I/.Complete these sentences 1. I like milk. …………….does she. 2. My sister doesn’t like fish. My brother ………… either. 3. He prefers …………..soccer to listening to music. 4. Would you ……….to go to the party? 5. Thanh is a skillful player. He plays…………….. 6. Does he live in the city? Yes, …….. ………….. 7. Does Mai like meat? No, ………….. …………… 8. How …………..are you. – I’m 40 kilos. Answer: 1. so 2. doesn’t 3. playing 4. like 5. skillfully 6. he does 7. she doesn’t 8. heavy II/. Use the correct form of the verbs 1. He ………. this letter tomorrow. ( not, send) 2. Minh and Nam …………. to the library yesterday morning. (go) 3. I …………….some oil and sugar. (buy) 4. They must …………….. now. (come) 5. Mr. Long should …………..in this company. (work) Answer: 1. won’t send 2. went 3. bought 4. come 5. work *Homework Prepare the final English test. Week:18(37) Period: 105. THE SECOND SEMESTER EXAMINATION. I. Objectives Check students’ knowledge from Unit 9 to Unit 15 II. Language contents Grammar and vocabulary (review) III. Question system Matrix TRƯỜNG THCS T.T TVT MA TRẬN ĐỀ THI KIỂM TRA TIẾNG ANH 7 HK II Tổ: TA-TD-MT-AN Năm học: 2011– 2012 ------------------Chủ đề. Nhận biết. Thông hiểu. Vận dụng Cấp độ thấp Cấp độ cao. Cộng.

(246) TNKQ TL I.LANGUAGE FOCUS Số câu Số điểm Tỉ lệ % II. READING. Số câu Số điểm Tỉ lệ % III. WRITING Số câu Số điểm Tỉ lệ % IV. LISTENING Số câu Số điểm Tỉ lệ % Tổng số câu Tổng số điểm Tỉ lệ %. TNKQ TL. TNKQ TL. TNKQ TL. KT từ bài 9 đến bài 14 12 3.0 30 % - HS đọc đoạn văn về trường học ở Mỹ và Việt Nam, hiểu và suy luận các thông tin trong đoạn văn để trả lời câu hỏi 4 2.0 20 %. 12 3.0 30 %. 4 2.0 20 % Viết lại câu theo cấu trúc gợi ý. 5 2.5 25 %. HS nghe và hoàn chỉnh câu 5 2.5 25 % 12 5 3.0 2.5 30 % 25 %. 4 2.0 20 %. 5 2.5 25 %. 5 2.5 25 %. 5 2.5 25 % 26 10.0 100 %.

(247) TRƯỜNG THCS TT TRẦN VĂN THỜI TỔ: TIẾNG ANH – TD – ÂN - MT ĐỀ CHÍNH THỨC Đddđ. ĐỀ KIỂM TRA HỌC KÌ II NĂM HỌC: 2011-2012 MÔN: TIẾNG ANH - Khối 7 Thời gian:45 phút (không kể phát đề). Họ và tên : ……………………….. Lớp : 7A… Mark(s). Teacher’s comments. I. LANGUAGE FOCUS Choose the best answers to complete the sentences (3.0ms) 1. Nga is a good student. She studies very ………….………… A. bad B. badly C. good D. well 2. The children ought ………….………… their homework before going to school. A. to do B. do C. doing D. did 3. Mai ………….……………… Ha Noi capital two years ago. A. visit B. visited C. is going to visit D. will visit 4. Would you like ………….………… to my house for dinner? - Yes, I’d love to. A. going B. to go C. go D. went 5. Mai likes beans, and ………….………… does her sister. A. either B. neither C. so D. too 6. Mai ……….. her homework every night. A. do B. does C. did D. will do 7. What is your …….? - 40 kilos. A. name B. height C. heavy D. weight 8. You should ...............your hands before meals. A. to wash B. wash C. washing D. washes 9. We enjoy …………in the summer. A. swimming B. to swim C. swim D. swims 10. He is a ................soccer player . He plays soccer very well. A .well B. bad C . good D. badly 11. Could you show me the way ……. the market, please? A. to B. on C. at D. next 12. How ……….is it from Ha noi to Hue? A. many B. long C. far D. much II. READING.

(248) Read the text carefully. In the summer holidays, Mr. Hung, Mrs. Chi and their children, Tuan and Hoa often go to the beach about two or three days. They always go to Vung Tau in the South of Viet Nam. They usually stay in a small house or a flat by the sea, but sometimes they stay in a hotel. Last summer they went to Nha Trang. They stayed at Sunshine hotel for three days . In the morning, Tuan played football with his father on the beach. Hoa and her mother walked along the beach and built sandcastles. They visited Tri Nguyen aquarium and saw different kinds of fish there . They also bought a lot of souvenirs for friends . Answer the questions (2.0 ms) 1. Does Hoa often go to the beach with her family in the summer holidays? ………………………………………………………………………………. 2. Where did they go last summer? ………………………………………………………………………………. 3. Did Tuan play volleyball with his father on the beach in the morning? ………………………………………………………………………………. 4. What did Hoa and her mother buy for their friends ? ………………………………………………………………………………. III. WRITING Rewrite the following sentences, beginning with the given words ( 2,5ms) 1. Why don’t we see a movie? [ Let’s …………………………………………………………………… 2. My father is a careful driver. [My father drives………………………………………………………… 3. You should wash your hands before meals. [You ought to……………………………………………………………. 4. How tall are you? [What is ………………………………………………………………….? 5. Let’s play soccer. [How about ………………………………………………………………? IV. LISTENING Listen and complete the sentences (2.5ms) Yesterday evening, Ba played (1)............................................ Nga saw a (2)........................................................................... Lan went to a (3)...................................................................... Hoa played (4)......................................................................... An watched a (5)...................................................................... -----------The end ----------.

(249) ĐÁP ÁN ĐỀ THI HỌC KÌ II MÔN TIẾNG ANH 7 NĂM HỌC 2010-2011 ĐỀ CHÍNH THỨC I. LANGUAGE FOCUS Choose the best answers to complete the sentences:(3.0ms) -0.25 m for each correct answer1. D 2. B 3. B. 4. B. 5. C 6. B 7. D 8. B 9. A 10. C 11. A 12. C II. READING Read the text carefully. Answer the questions:(2.0 ms) -0. 5 m for each correct answer1. Yes, she does. 2. Last summer they went to Nha Trang. 3. No, he didn’t. 4. They bought a lot of souvenirs for their friends . III. WRITING Rewrite the following sentences, beginning with the given words: ( 2,5ms) -0. 5 m for each correct answer1. Let’s see a movie. 2. My father drives carefully. 3. You ought to wash your hands before meals . 4. Why don’t we go to the beach? 5. How about playing soccer ? IV. LISTENING Listen and complete the sentences. (2.5ms) Tape transcript: Yesterday evening, Ba played table tennis. Nga saw a movie. Lan went to a restaurant. Hoa played chess. An watched a soccer match. ANSWER: (1) table tennis (2) movie.

(250) (3) restaurant (4) chess (5) soccer match -0. 5 m for each correct answer-----------The end----------. TRƯỜNG THCS TT TRẦN VĂN THỜI TỔ: TIẾNG ANH – TD – ÂN - MT ĐddđĐỀ DỰ BỊ. ĐỀ KIỂM TRA HỌC KÌ II NĂM HỌC: 2011-2012 MÔN: TIẾNG ANH - Khối 7 Thời gian:45 phút (không kể phát đề). Họ và tên : ……………………….. Lớp : 7A… Mark(s). Teacher’s comments. I. LANGUAGE FOCUS A.Choose the best answers to complete the sentences :(2,5ms) 1. Did he play volleyball ? No, he ................. A. doesn’t B. am not C. don’t D. didn’t 2. My father doesn’t like spinach, and ........... do I. A. either B. neither C. so D. too 3. He is a ................soccer player . He plays soccer very well. A .well B. bad C . good D. badly 4. What kinds of ……………… do you like? – I like cartoon. A. lakes B. flowers C. pictures D. programs 5.…………. does Minh’s tooth hurt? -Because he has a cavity. A. What B. Who C. Why D. Where 6. Nga is a good student. She studies very ………….………… A. bad B. badly C. good D. well 7. Would you like ………….………… to my house for dinner? - Yes, I’d love to. A. going B. to go C. go D. went 8. Which ….is she in? – She is in class 7A. A. grade B. class C. school D. room 9. What is her …..? – 45kilos. A. weight B. heavy C. height D. name.

(251) 10. This evening, Nga is going ….pgrograms about tennagers. A. watching B. to watch C. watch D. watched II. READING Read and answer the questions.(2,5ms) Today, there is a TV set in nearly every home. People watch TV every day, and some people watch it from morning until night. Americans watch TV about 35 hours a week. But is TV good or bad for you? People have different answers. Some say that there is a lot of violence on TV today, the programs are terrible and people don’t get any exercise because they only sit and watch TV. Others think that TV programs bring news from around the world, help you learn many useful things, especial children. Thanks to TV, people learn about life in other countries, and it helps people relax after a long day of hard work. * Write T or F (0.5m) 1. ………There is a TV set in nearly every home today. 2. ……….TV helps people relax after a long day of hard work. * Answers (2,0m) 1. Is TV very popular today? ………………………………………………………………………………. 2. How many hours do Americans watch TV a day? ………………………………………………………………………………. 3 . Is there a lot of violence on TV today? ………………………………………………………………………………. 4. What does TV programs bring to you? ………………………………………………………………………………. III. WRITING Give the correct form of verbs (2.5ms) 1.You should (visit) ............................ your grandmother. 2. I (watch) ......................... a football match on TV last night. 3. She always (go) ...................... to bed late. 4. I must (clean) ………………… my room before going out. 5. She (not, see) ............................. him yesterday. IV. LISTENING Listen and fill in the blanks(2.5ms) Mai: What is on TV at half past six tonight, Hoa? Hoa: Let me see. It’s the ………(1) ‘Tom and Jerry’. You want to watch it, don’t you ? Mai: Come on, Hoa! I want to watch the ………………show (2). When does it start ? Hoa: It starts at …………………………. .(3) Mai: And what about the ……………………4) ? What time is it on? Hoa: It’s on at ……………………………….. .(5) Mai: Ok. That sounds great..

(252) -----------The end ----------. ĐÁP ÁN ĐỀ THI HỌC KÌ II MÔN TIẾNG ANH 7 NĂM HỌC 2011-2012 ĐỀ DỰ BỊ I. LANGUAGE FOCUS A.Choose the best answers to complete the sentences (3.0ms) -0.25 m for each correct answer1. D. 2. B 3. C 4. D 5. C. 6. D. 7. B 8. B 9. A 10. B II. READING Read and answer the questions.(2ms) -0. 5 m for each correct answer* Answers 1. Yes, it is. 2. Americans watch TV about 5 hours a day. 3. Yes, there is. 4. TV programs bring news from around the world. III. WRITING Give the correct form of verbs (2.5ms) -0. 5 m for each correct answer1. visit 2. watched 3. goes 4. clean 5. didn’t see IV. LISTENING Listen and fill in the blanks(2.5ms) -0. 5 m for each correct answerTape transcript: Mai: What is on TV at half past six tonight, Hoa? Hoa: Let me see. It’s the cartoon (1) ‘ Tom and Jerry’..

(253) You want to watch it, don’t you ? Mai: Come on, Hoa! I want to watch the sports show (2) . When does it start ? Hoa: It starts at seven thirty- five .(3) Mai: And what about the movie (4) ? What time is it on ? Hoa: It’s on at a quarter to eight .(5) Mai: Ok. That sounds great. (1) cartoon ; (2) sports; (3) seven thirty- five / 7.35; (4) movie; (5) a quarter to eight / 7.45 Week 37 Singnature:.

(254) I. LANGUAGE FOCUS(2.5marks).

(255) Choose the best option by circling the letter A, B , C or D: 1. Minh ...................... to the zoo last Sunday. A. goes B. went C. is going 2. I received a letter from my aunt …………………... A. next week B. always C. yesterday 3. You should ...................... your hands before meals. A. to wash B. wash C. washing 4. I would like .................some rice and vegetables. A. buying B. to buy C. buy 5. My brother likes swimming . ……………...................... A. So I do B. Yes, I do C. I do, too 6. What kind of ....................do you like ? I like cartoons. A. books B. films C. pictures 7. Many young people prefer ...................video games. A. to play B. plays C. play 8.Mr.Robinson speaks Vietnamese very......................... A. fluently B. skillfully C. good 9. Milk is good for your health , …………… is meat. A. too B. either C. so 10. How.................is Nhi ? - She is 36 kilos A. tall B. height C. old. D. go D. Monday D. washes D. buys D. too do I D. stories D. played D. bad D. neither D. heavy. II. READING(2.5marks) Read the passage. Check the sentences True or False. Then answer the questions. Yesterday, Nhi and her aunt went to the market. They wanted to buy some meat, vegetables and fruit for their dinner. First, they went to the meat stall. There was a good selection of meat on the stall: chicken, pork and beef. Nhi doesn't like pork and her aunt doesn't either. So they bought some beef. Next, they went to the vegetable stall. They bought some spinach and cucumbers. Nhi likes them and so does her aunt. They are her aunt's favorite vegetables. Finally, Nhi and her aunt stopped at a fruit stall. They wanted to buy a papaya and a pineapple, but they weren’t ripe. Therefore, they bought some oranges in stead. A/. True(T) or False(F)? ……………..1. Yesterday, Nhi and her aunt went to the post office. .…………….2. They bought some beef, spinach, cucumbers and oranges at the market. B/. Questions: 1. When did Nhi and her aunt go to the market? ……………………………………………………………………………………………………. 2. Does Nhi like pork ? ……………………………………………………………………………………………………. 3. Did they buy some spinach and cucumbers at the vegetable stall?.

(256) ……………………………………………………………………………………………………. 4. Why didn’t they buy a papaya and a pineapple at the fruit stall? ……………………………………………………………………………………………………. III. WRITING (2.5marks) Rewrite the following sentences using the words in the brackets: 1. I like that film. He likes that film . (too) ……………………………………………………………………………………………………. 2.The boys in my class are good players. The boys play soccer very……………. (good) ……………………………………………………………………………………………………. 3.They (buy) a lot of souvenirs for their parents yesterday morning. ……………………………………………………………………………………………………. 4.Minh (not, do) his homework tomorrow. ……………………………………………………………………………………………………. 5.Lan can’t hear you. I can’t hear you. ( neither). ……………………………………………………………………………………………………. IV. LISTENING(2.5marks) Listen carefully and decide who ( in A ) did what (in B) yesterday. Match the name and the number correctly. A. B. Nga Long Lan. 1.Watching TV 2.Going to a restaurant 3.Playing video games 4.Listening to pop music 5. Playing chess. YOUR ANSWER: Nga : ………………………… Long : ………………………. Lan : ………………………... ĐÁP ÁN ĐỀ THI TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KÌ II, NĂM HỌC 2009-2010 Subject : English 7 School year: 2009-2010.

(257) I. LANGUAGE FOCUS(2.5marks) Choose the best option to complete each of the following sentences. Mỗi câu 0,25 diểm 1. B 2. C 3. B II. READING(2.5marks) A/. True(T) or False(F)?. 4. B. 5. C. 6. B. 7. A. 8. A. 9. C. 10. D. Mỗi câu 0,25 điểm 1. False. 2. True. B/. Questions: Mỗi câu 0,5 điểm. Nếu có ý đúng có thể được 0,25 điểm. 1. Nhi and her aunt went to the market yesterday. 2. No, she doesn’t. 3. Yes, they did. 4. Because they weren’t ripe. III. WRITING (2.5marks) Rewrite the following sentences using the words in the brackets: Mỗi câu đúng 0,5 điểm 1. I like that film and he likes that film ,too./ …and he does, too. 2. The boys play soccer very well. 3.They bought a lot of souvenirs for their parents yesterday morning. 4. Minh will not do the housework tomorrow. 5. Lan can’t hear you and neither can I./ …and I can’t either. IV. LISTENING(2.5marks) Listen carefully and decide who ( in A ) did what (in B) yesterday. Match the name and the number: 0,5 điểm cho mỗi đáp án đúng. Yesterday was Sunday. Nga, Lan and Long did not go to their English class. They did different things last night. Nga stayed at home. She watched TV and played chess with her grandmother. Lan visited her friends and ate out in a restaurant with them. Long played video games and listened to pop music. *Answers: Nga : 1, 5 Long : 3, 4 Lan : 2 Week 37 Singnature:.

(258)

(259)

PLAN ENGLISH 20122013

Tài liệu liên quan

Tài liệu bạn tìm kiếm đã sẵn sàng tải về